{"title":"Pegboard","description":"","products":[{"product_id":"48-heavy-duty-workbench-adjustable-pegboard-desk","title":"48''Adjustable Workbench with pegboard, Heavy Duty Wooden Desktop Workbench with Wheels, 1600 lb. Load Capacity, Rolling Workbench with AC\/USB Outlet, Hooks, Shelf, for Garage, Workshop, Office, Home.","description":"\u003cul data-immersive-translate-walked=\"4663a4d0-d79e-46e0-9917-2d5547c928b3\"\u003e\n\u003cli data-immersive-translate-walked=\"4663a4d0-d79e-46e0-9917-2d5547c928b3\" data-immersive-translate-paragraph=\"1\"\u003eStable structure: Designed to handle the task, this workbench can support up to 2000 lbs. thanks to its sturdy reinforced steel construction. It provides a sturdy and stable workbench for a variety of projects.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli data-immersive-translate-walked=\"4663a4d0-d79e-46e0-9917-2d5547c928b3\" data-immersive-translate-paragraph=\"1\"\u003eVersatile Power Ports: Stay powered and connected with the built-in power outlets. 4 AC power ports and 2 USB outlets provide plenty of charging options, so you can conveniently charge equipment or operate power tools without the hassle of searching for additional outlets.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli data-immersive-translate-walked=\"4663a4d0-d79e-46e0-9917-2d5547c928b3\" data-immersive-translate-paragraph=\"1\"\u003eWorkshop organization: Keep your tools and supplies organized and within reach with the included pegboard, storage shelf and 18 hooks. This workbench offers plenty of storage options to help you maintain a neat and efficient workspace.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli data-immersive-translate-walked=\"4663a4d0-d79e-46e0-9917-2d5547c928b3\" data-immersive-translate-paragraph=\"1\"\u003eHeight adjustable: This versatile workbench is suitable for garages, workshops and home offices. It also offers height adjustability, so you can change between standing and sitting positions for increased comfort and productivity.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli data-immersive-translate-walked=\"4663a4d0-d79e-46e0-9917-2d5547c928b3\" data-immersive-translate-paragraph=\"1\"\u003eAssembly is a piece of cake: We come with a detailed assembly guide and clear signage so you won't struggle to assemble it, and it features four wheels for easy mobility, allowing you to move the table around your workspace with ease or conveniently store it when not in use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51288150802706,"sku":"HOMDIYGJP100","price":286.01,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/d49990aa3245fd993e2a399e6f264883.jpg?v=1762200480"},{"product_id":"pegboard-tool-cart-3-tier-garage-organizer","title":"3-Tier DIY Detachable Utility Cart Storage Tool Cart With Steel Pegboard, Foldable Rolling Tool Cart with Wheels For Garage Organizer and Tool Storage","description":"\u003cul data-immersive-translate-walked=\"ba860202-af6f-4375-bc2d-7c60b7be635f\"\u003e\n\u003cli data-immersive-translate-walked=\"ba860202-af6f-4375-bc2d-7c60b7be635f\" data-immersive-translate-paragraph=\"1\"\u003eSturdy and Mobile Tool Cart : This 3-tier tool cart is made of high-quality steel, easy mobility and stability. The storage cart has 4 rolling wheels perfect for transporting tools across various surfaces, from concrete floors to workshop tiles. You can load various tools and supplies, making your job more efficient.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli data-immersive-translate-walked=\"ba860202-af6f-4375-bc2d-7c60b7be635f\" data-immersive-translate-paragraph=\"1\"\u003eLarge Capacity: Equipped with 3-tiered tool shelves, this tool organizer cart boasts ample storage capacity to accommodate all your tools. Furthermore, it incorporates a practical side panel featuring a pegboard design for each side, along with a comprehensive set of accessories including 4 pcs side organizers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli data-immersive-translate-walked=\"ba860202-af6f-4375-bc2d-7c60b7be635f\" data-immersive-translate-paragraph=\"1\"\u003eVarious applications: With its versatile design, this service trolley can be used in the garage, warehouse, workshops, repair workshops, etc. In addition, the robust tool trolley with its compact size is perfect for small apartments with limited space. Use this metal multi-purpose trolley for storing books and tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli data-immersive-translate-walked=\"ba860202-af6f-4375-bc2d-7c60b7be635f\" data-immersive-translate-paragraph=\"1\"\u003eDetachable Design: Designed for quick setup and space-saving, the tool cart with pegboard simplifies installation with clear instructions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli data-immersive-translate-walked=\"ba860202-af6f-4375-bc2d-7c60b7be635f\" data-immersive-translate-paragraph=\"1\"\u003eDIY Design: Compared with the ordinary rolling cart, our improved pegboard cart consists of 4-side perforated steel detacheable pegboard which can DIY according to your preferences and needs!\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51290121896210,"sku":"HOMDIYGJP113","price":346.35,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/Main-01_636e6ee3-bff3-49bd-84f5-da195299f04f.jpg?v=1762200488"},{"product_id":"3-tier-rolling-tool-cart-on-wheels-heavy-duty-utility-tool-cart-with-pegboard-for-repair-shop-garage-warehouse-red","title":"3 Tier Rolling Tool Cart on Wheels,Heavy Duty Utility Tool Cart with Pegboard for Repair Shop, Garage, Warehouse,Red","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cmeta charset=\"UTF-8\"\u003e \u003cmeta name=\"viewport\" content=\"width=device-width, initial-scale=1.0, maximum-scale=1.0, user-scalable=yes\"\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cstyle\u003e\n \/* ===== TOOL CART PRODUCT DESCRIPTION – ENCAPSULATED STYLES ===== *\/\n \/* 所有样式均以 .toolcart-desc 为前缀，避免与主题冲突 *\/\n .toolcart-desc {\n all: initial; \/* 温和重置，减少继承干扰 *\/\n display: block;\n font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;\n line-height: 1.5;\n color: #1e1e1e;\n max-width: 100%;\n margin: 0;\n padding: 0;\n box-sizing: border-box;\n }\n .toolcart-desc *,\n .toolcart-desc *::before,\n .toolcart-desc *::after {\n box-sizing: border-box;\n margin: 0;\n padding: 0;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .container {\n width: 100%;\n padding: 0;\n background-color: transparent;\n }\n \/* 标题通用 *\/\n .toolcart-desc h2,\n .toolcart-desc h3,\n .toolcart-desc h4 {\n font-weight: 600;\n line-height: 1.3;\n margin: 1.5em 0 0.75em 0;\n color: #1a1a1a;\n }\n .toolcart-desc h2:first-child {\n margin-top: 0.25em;\n }\n .toolcart-desc h2 {\n font-size: 1.8rem;\n border-bottom: 2px solid #e0e0e0;\n padding-bottom: 0.4rem;\n }\n .toolcart-desc h3 {\n font-size: 1.5rem;\n border-left: 6px solid #c62828;\n padding-left: 1rem;\n margin-top: 1.8rem;\n }\n \/* 概述段落 *\/\n .toolcart-desc .overview-text {\n font-size: 1.1rem;\n background: #f9f9f9;\n padding: 1.5rem 1.8rem;\n border-radius: 16px;\n margin: 1rem 0 1.8rem 0;\n border-left: 6px solid #c62828;\n box-shadow: 0 2px 8px rgba(0,0,0,0.03);\n }\n \/* 特点列表 - 竖向，利于SEO *\/\n .toolcart-desc .feature-list {\n list-style: none;\n margin: 1.5rem 0;\n display: flex;\n flex-direction: column;\n gap: 1.2rem;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .feature-item {\n display: flex;\n align-items: flex-start;\n gap: 1rem;\n font-size: 1.05rem;\n padding: 0.25rem 0;\n border-bottom: 1px dashed #ddd;\n padding-bottom: 1rem;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .feature-item:last-child {\n border-bottom: none;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .feature-emoji {\n font-size: 1.9rem;\n min-width: 2.5rem;\n text-align: center;\n line-height: 1.3;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .feature-content {\n flex: 1;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .feature-content strong {\n color: #b71c1c;\n font-size: 1.15rem;\n display: block;\n margin-bottom: 0.25rem;\n }\n \/* 规格表格 *\/\n .toolcart-desc .specs-wrapper {\n overflow-x: auto;\n margin: 1.5rem 0 2rem;\n border-radius: 14px;\n border: 1px solid #eaeaea;\n background: #fff;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .specs-table {\n width: 100%;\n border-collapse: collapse;\n font-size: 1rem;\n min-width: 500px;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .specs-table th,\n .toolcart-desc .specs-table td {\n padding: 1rem 1.5rem;\n text-align: left;\n border-bottom: 1px solid #efefef;\n vertical-align: top;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .specs-table tr:last-child td {\n border-bottom: none;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .specs-table th {\n background-color: #f2f2f2;\n font-weight: 600;\n width: 40%;\n color: #2c2c2c;\n border-right: 1px solid #ddd;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .specs-table td {\n background-color: #fff;\n color: #2e2e2e;\n }\n \/* FAQ 区域 — 全部展开，无折叠 *\/\n .toolcart-desc .faq-section {\n margin: 2.5rem 0 1rem;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .faq-item {\n margin-bottom: 1.8rem;\n border-bottom: 1px solid #e5e5e5;\n padding-bottom: 1.2rem;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .faq-question {\n font-weight: 700;\n font-size: 1.2rem;\n display: flex;\n align-items: baseline;\n gap: 0.75rem;\n color: #1e1e1e;\n margin-bottom: 0.5rem;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .faq-question .q-icon {\n color: #c62828;\n font-size: 1.5rem;\n font-weight: 700;\n min-width: 1.8rem;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .faq-answer {\n padding-left: 2.5rem;\n font-size: 1.03rem;\n color: #3a3a3a;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .faq-answer p {\n margin-bottom: 0.5rem;\n }\n \/* 移动端微调 *\/\n @media (max-width: 600px) {\n .toolcart-desc h2 {\n font-size: 1.6rem;\n }\n .toolcart-desc h3 {\n font-size: 1.35rem;\n padding-left: 0.75rem;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .overview-text {\n padding: 1.2rem;\n font-size: 1rem;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .feature-item {\n gap: 0.75rem;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .feature-emoji {\n font-size: 1.7rem;\n min-width: 2.2rem;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .specs-table th,\n .toolcart-desc .specs-table td {\n padding: 0.8rem 1rem;\n }\n .toolcart-desc .faq-question {\n font-size: 1.1rem;\n }\n }\n \/* 辅助分隔 *\/\n .toolcart-desc .divider-light {\n height: 1px;\n background: linear-gradient(to right, transparent, #ccc, transparent);\n margin: 2rem 0 1rem;\n }\n \/* 关键词高亮（自然） *\/\n .toolcart-desc .highlight-text {\n font-weight: 500;\n }\n \u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003c!-- 产品描述区块 — 可直接复制到 Shopify 产品描述框 (HTML 模式) --\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"toolcart-desc\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"container\"\u003e\n\u003c!-- 产品概述 (自然销售语气) --\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"overview-text\"\u003e\n\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 1.3rem; margin-right: 8px;\"\u003e🛠️\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eTake control of workshop chaos.\u003c\/strong\u003e Whether you’re a professional mechanic, a dedicated DIYer, or managing a busy warehouse, this \u003cstrong\u003e3‑Tier Rolling Tool Cart\u003c\/strong\u003e transforms how you move and organize gear. The heavy‑duty steel frame, smooth‑rolling casters, and built‑in pegboard put everything you need right at your fingertips — no more wasted steps or cluttered benches. Glides effortlessly across concrete, epoxy, or tile and locks securely in place when it’s time to work. From power tools to spare parts, keep your essentials mobile, visible, and ready for action.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c!-- 产品特点 (竖向列表，嵌入关键词) --\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e🔧 Heavy‑Duty Rolling Tool Cart Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul class=\"feature-list\"\u003e\n\u003cli class=\"feature-item\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"feature-emoji\"\u003e🚚\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"feature-content\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEffortless Mobility \u0026amp; Control\u003c\/strong\u003e Four 4‑inch industrial‑grade casters (two lockable) paired with an ergonomic wide handle. The cart glides smoothly across workshop floors, garage concrete, or warehouse surfaces. Lock the casters to keep the cart rock‑steady during use.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli class=\"feature-item\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"feature-emoji\"\u003e📦\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"feature-content\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e3‑Tier Spacious Steel Shelves:\u003c\/strong\u003e Three oversized shelves provide ample room for bulky power tools, paint cans, mechanic’s sets, or supply bins. Each tier is crafted from reinforced steel, engineered to handle heavy daily loads while maintaining a clean, organized footprint.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli class=\"feature-item\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"feature-emoji\"\u003e🪝\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"feature-content\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSide‑Mounted Pegboard for Hand Tools:\u003c\/strong\u003e Keep wrenches, pliers, screwdrivers, and accessories within arm’s reach. The integrated pegboard maximizes vertical storage, freeing shelf space for larger equipment. Perfect for repair shops where quick access is a must.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli class=\"feature-item\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"feature-emoji\"\u003e⚙️\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"feature-content\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRugged All‑Steel Construction (Red Finish)\u003c\/strong\u003e Built from premium steel with a durable red powder‑coat finish that resists scratches, rust, and daily wear. Designed to thrive in garages, repair shops, and industrial warehouses — it’s a long‑term storage partner.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli class=\"feature-item\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"feature-emoji\"\u003e🧰\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"feature-content\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVersatile Workspace Solution\u003c\/strong\u003e Ideal for mechanics, woodworkers, detailers, and warehouse teams. Use it as a mobile workstation, parts cart, or rolling supply station. The combination of open shelves and pegboard adapts to your workflow.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c!-- 规格参数 (表格形式，清晰专业) --\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e📋 3‑Tier Tool Cart Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"specs-wrapper\"\u003e\n\u003ctable class=\"specs-table\"\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e🟥 Color\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRed (durable powder‑coat finish)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e🏗️ Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy‑Duty Steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e📐 Assembled Dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e32.6\" x 15.0\" x 35.8\"\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e⚖️ Product Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30.0 lbs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e📦 Package Dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e32.0\" x 18.0\" x 11.0\"\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e📦 Package Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35.0 lbs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e🔄 Caster Details\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\" Total‑Lock Casters (2 locking, 2 swivel)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e🧩 Shelf Count\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 Tiers + Integrated Pegboard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e🛠️ Recommended Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRepair Shop, Garage, Warehouse, Jobsite\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c!-- 常见问题 FAQ (全部展开，无折叠) --\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-section\"\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions – Rolling Tool Cart with Pegboard\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-question\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"q-icon\"\u003eQ:\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003eHow much weight can the cart hold?\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-answer\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e🔨 The heavy‑duty steel frame is designed to support up to \u003cstrong\u003e150 lbs\u003c\/strong\u003e (evenly distributed across shelves). This is more than enough for standard power tools, automotive parts, and workshop supplies. For best stability, place heavier items on the lower shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-question\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"q-icon\"\u003eQ:\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003eDoes the cart come assembled? How difficult is setup?\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-answer\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e🛠️ The cart requires \u003cstrong\u003eminimal assembly\u003c\/strong\u003e. All hardware and an illustrated manual are included. Most users complete the setup in 20–30 minutes with basic tools (wrench included). The casters simply bolt on, and the shelves attach securely to the uprights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-question\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"q-icon\"\u003eQ:\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003eCan the pegboard be removed or repositioned?\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-answer\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e🔩 The side pegboard is \u003cstrong\u003eintegrated into the frame\u003c\/strong\u003e for durability and is not designed to be removed. However, its placement is optimized for quick access while working. You can use standard 1\/4\" peg hooks and accessories to customize your layout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-question\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"q-icon\"\u003eQ:\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003eAre the casters suitable for rough floors or outdoor use?\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-answer\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e🏭 The 4‑inch casters are built for smooth rolling on concrete, epoxy, tile, and asphalt. While they handle minor cracks and thresholds well, we recommend avoiding extended exposure to heavy rain or deep mud to preserve the bearing quality. Perfect for garage-to-driveway transitions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-question\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"q-icon\"\u003eQ:\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003eWhat type of hooks work with the pegboard? Are they included?\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-answer\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e🪝 The cart includes a starter set of \u003cstrong\u003e4 peg hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e (single and double prong). The pegboard uses standard 1\/4\" hole spacing, so any universal pegboard hooks or bins will fit. It’s easy to expand your setup with accessories from any hardware store.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c!-- 细小分隔 (视觉舒适) --\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52196067148050,"sku":"W465P146340","price":131.3,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/c73ae82a21907f4a22151cce68dc123f.jpg?v=1776130332"},{"product_id":"3-tier-rolling-tool-cart-on-wheels-heavy-duty-utility-tool-cart-with-pegboard-for-repair-shop-garage-warehouse-blue","title":"3 Tier Rolling Tool Cart on Wheels,Heavy Duty Utility Tool Cart with Pegboard for Repair Shop, Garage, Warehouse,Blue","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n \/* ---------- 封装样式前缀：.pd-3tier-cart ---------- *\/\n \/* 所有样式均限定在此容器内，避免与Shopify主题冲突 *\/\n .pd-3tier-cart {\n width: 100%;\n max-width: 100%;\n margin: 0;\n padding: 0;\n box-sizing: border-box;\n font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;\n line-height: 1.5;\n color: #1e1e1e;\n background-color: transparent;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart *,\n .pd-3tier-cart *::before,\n .pd-3tier-cart *::after {\n box-sizing: border-box;\n }\n\n \/* 标题体系：自然嵌入长尾关键词 *\/\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-section-title {\n font-size: 1.8rem;\n font-weight: 600;\n margin: 0 0 0.5rem 0;\n padding: 0;\n line-height: 1.3;\n color: #0a2540;\n letter-spacing: -0.02em;\n border-bottom: 2px solid #eaeef3;\n padding-bottom: 0.6rem;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-subtitle {\n font-size: 1.4rem;\n font-weight: 600;\n margin: 1.8rem 0 1rem 0;\n color: #1e3a5f;\n display: flex;\n align-items: center;\n gap: 8px;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-subtitle i {\n font-size: 1.6rem;\n }\n\n \/* 产品概述段落 *\/\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-overview {\n font-size: 1.05rem;\n margin: 1.2rem 0 1.8rem 0;\n padding: 0 0 0.2rem 0;\n color: #2c3e50;\n background: #f9fbfd;\n padding: 1.2rem 1.5rem;\n border-radius: 12px;\n border-left: 5px solid #1e88e5;\n }\n\n \/* 特点列表 —— 竖向排列，SEO友好 *\/\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-feature-list {\n list-style: none;\n margin: 0.5rem 0 1.8rem 0;\n padding: 0;\n display: flex;\n flex-direction: column;\n gap: 0.9rem;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-feature-list li {\n display: flex;\n align-items: flex-start;\n gap: 12px;\n font-size: 1rem;\n padding: 0.25rem 0;\n border-bottom: 1px dashed #d0dde9;\n padding-bottom: 0.9rem;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-feature-list li:last-child {\n border-bottom: none;\n padding-bottom: 0;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-emoji-bullet {\n font-size: 1.4rem;\n min-width: 28px;\n text-align: center;\n line-height: 1.3;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-feature-text {\n flex: 1;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-feature-text strong {\n color: #0a2540;\n font-weight: 600;\n }\n\n \/* 规格表格 —— 干净、移动端可滚动 *\/\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-spec-table-wrapper {\n margin: 1.2rem 0 2rem 0;\n border-radius: 12px;\n background: #ffffff;\n border: 1px solid #e2e9f0;\n overflow-x: auto;\n -webkit-overflow-scrolling: touch;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-spec-table {\n width: 100%;\n border-collapse: collapse;\n font-size: 0.95rem;\n min-width: 500px;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-spec-table td,\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-spec-table th {\n padding: 12px 16px;\n border-bottom: 1px solid #eaeef3;\n text-align: left;\n vertical-align: top;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-spec-table tr:last-child td {\n border-bottom: none;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-spec-table td:first-child {\n font-weight: 600;\n color: #1e3a5f;\n width: 40%;\n background-color: #fafcfe;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-spec-table td:last-child {\n color: #1f2e3d;\n }\n\n \/* FAQ区块 —— 全部展开，无折叠 *\/\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-faq-section {\n margin: 2rem 0 1rem 0;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-faq-item {\n margin-bottom: 1.4rem;\n padding-bottom: 0.8rem;\n border-bottom: 1px solid #dee7ef;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-faq-question {\n font-size: 1.15rem;\n font-weight: 600;\n margin-bottom: 0.5rem;\n color: #0f2b42;\n display: flex;\n align-items: baseline;\n gap: 8px;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-faq-question .pd-q-icon {\n font-size: 1.3rem;\n min-width: 26px;\n }\n\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-faq-answer {\n font-size: 0.98rem;\n margin-left: 34px;\n color: #2e445b;\n padding-right: 0.5rem;\n }\n\n \/* 工具条、提示文本 *\/\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-badge-note {\n display: inline-block;\n background: #eef4fa;\n padding: 0.3rem 1rem;\n border-radius: 30px;\n font-size: 0.9rem;\n margin-top: 0.5rem;\n }\n\n \/* 移动端微调 *\/\n @media (max-width: 640px) {\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-section-title {\n font-size: 1.6rem;\n }\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-subtitle {\n font-size: 1.25rem;\n }\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-overview {\n padding: 1rem 1.2rem;\n font-size: 1rem;\n }\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-feature-list li {\n font-size: 0.98rem;\n }\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-faq-question {\n font-size: 1.05rem;\n }\n }\n\n \/* 简单强调 *\/\n .pd-3tier-cart .pd-accent {\n color: #1e5f8e;\n font-weight: 500;\n }\n \u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003c!-- 产品描述容器：所有内容及样式均封装在 .pd-3tier-cart 中 --\u003e\n\u003ch2 class=\"pd-3tier-cart\"\u003e\n\u003c!-- 产品主标题 (H1级别，包含核心关键词) --\u003e\u003c!-- 产品概述：自然销售型描述，突出场景与人群 --\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-overview\"\u003e\n\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 1.2rem; margin-right: 6px;\"\u003e📦\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eProfessional-Grade Mobility \u0026amp; Organization\u003c\/strong\u003e – Whether you’re a seasoned mechanic, a dedicated DIYer, or running a busy repair shop, this \u003cstrong\u003e3-tier rolling tool cart\u003c\/strong\u003e keeps your workspace efficient and clutter‑free. The heavy‑duty steel frame, combined with a versatile pegboard side panel, lets you store bulky power tools, spare parts, and hand tools all in one place. Glide it across the garage floor or navigate tight warehouse aisles with ease — the dual locking casters and wide handle give you total control. Built for daily use in \u003cstrong\u003erepair shops, garages, and warehouses\u003c\/strong\u003e, it’s the smart upgrade your workflow deserves.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003ch2 class=\"pd-3tier-cart\"\u003e\u003c!-- 产品特点 (竖向列表, emoji点缀, SEO长尾词融入标题) --\u003e\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-subtitle\"\u003e\n\u003cspan\u003e🔧\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003eHeavy‑Duty 3‑Tier Tool Cart Features \u0026amp; Storage Solutions\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cul class=\"pd-feature-list\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"pd-emoji-bullet\"\u003e🔄\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan class=\"pd-feature-text\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEffortless 360° Maneuverability:\u003c\/strong\u003e Equipped with four 4‑inch casters (two lockable) and an ergonomic wide handle, this rolling cart glides smoothly over concrete, epoxy, or tile. Lock the brakes when you need a stationary workstation.\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"pd-emoji-bullet\"\u003e📚\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan class=\"pd-feature-text\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThree Spacious Storage Tiers:\u003c\/strong\u003e Each heavy‑gauge steel shelf provides ample room for large toolboxes, paint cans, diagnostic equipment, or automotive parts. The open‑shelf design allows quick access and keeps everything visible.\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"pd-emoji-bullet\"\u003e🗂️\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan class=\"pd-feature-text\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSide‑Mounted Pegboard Panel:\u003c\/strong\u003e Customize your setup — hang wrenches, screwdrivers, pliers, or extension cords. Comes with 4 multi‑purpose hooks to get you started. Keeps frequently used tools within arm’s reach.\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"pd-emoji-bullet\"\u003e🏋️\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan class=\"pd-feature-text\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRugged Steel Construction:\u003c\/strong\u003e Built from powder‑coated steel that resists scratches, dents, and corrosion. The vibrant blue finish adds a professional look while protecting against workshop wear.\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"pd-emoji-bullet\"\u003e🧩\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan class=\"pd-feature-text\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVersatile for Any Job Site:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ideal for automotive repair shops, home garages, warehouses, woodworking shops, and industrial maintenance. Adapts to your needs — from storing heavy machinery parts to organizing detailing supplies.\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"pd-emoji-bullet\"\u003e📏\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan class=\"pd-feature-text\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSpace‑Saving Footprint:\u003c\/strong\u003e Measures 32.6\" L x 15\" W x 35.8\" H — compact enough to tuck beside a workbench yet substantial enough to hold up to 330 lbs total (evenly distributed).\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 class=\"pd-3tier-cart\"\u003e\u003c!-- 规格参数表格 (Technical Specifications) --\u003e\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-subtitle\"\u003e\n\u003cspan\u003e📋\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003eSpecifications – 3-Tier Utility Cart with Pegboard\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-spec-table-wrapper\"\u003e\n\u003ctable class=\"pd-spec-table\"\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eItem Code\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW465P146341\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue (Powder Coated Finish)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy‑Gauge Steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembled Dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e32.6\" x 15.0\" x 35.8\"\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembled Weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30.0 lbs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackage Dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e32.0\" x 18.0\" x 11.0\"\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackage Weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35.0 lbs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCasters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 x 4\" Swivel Casters (2 Locking, 2 Non‑Locking)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf Capacity (per tier)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 110 lbs (evenly distributed) \/ total 330 lbs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePegboard Panel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated side panel with 4 included hooks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle Design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic wide push\/pull handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly Required\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes (tools \u0026amp; manual included)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003ch2 class=\"pd-3tier-cart\"\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\u003c!-- 常见问题 (FAQ) —— 全部展开，无手风琴 --\u003e\u003cspan\u003e❓\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003eFrequently Asked Questions – Rolling Tool Cart\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-section\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-question\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"pd-q-icon\"\u003e🔹\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003eWhat is the actual weight capacity of this cart? Can it hold heavy power tools?\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-answer\"\u003eAbsolutely. Each of the three steel shelves is rated to support up to \u003cstrong\u003e110 lbs\u003c\/strong\u003e when the weight is evenly distributed, giving you a total capacity of \u003cstrong\u003e330 lbs\u003c\/strong\u003e. This is more than enough for multiple power tool cases, a bench grinder, or stacks of automotive parts. The locking casters ensure the cart stays put even under full load.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-question\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"pd-q-icon\"\u003e🔹\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003eHow easy is it to move on rough or uneven floors?\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-answer\"\u003eThe 4‑inch swivel casters are designed to handle common garage and workshop surfaces — including concrete with expansion joints, epoxy coatings, and warehouse flooring. The two lockable casters provide stability when parked. For very rough terrain (like gravel), we recommend unloading the cart first, but on typical shop floors, it rolls with minimal effort.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-question\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"pd-q-icon\"\u003e🔹\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003eDoes the pegboard come with hooks? What else can I hang on it?\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-answer\"\u003eYes — the cart includes \u003cstrong\u003e4 multi‑purpose hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e compatible with standard pegboard spacing. You can easily add more hooks or accessories (available at any hardware store) to hang wrenches, pliers, safety glasses, extension cords, or even a small clipboard. It's a fantastic way to keep your most‑used tools visible and within arm's reach.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-question\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"pd-q-icon\"\u003e🔹\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003eIs assembly complicated? Do I need special tools?\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-answer\"\u003eNot at all. The cart ships with a clear instruction manual and all necessary hardware. Most customers complete assembly in \u003cstrong\u003e25–35 minutes\u003c\/strong\u003e using the included wrench. Having a second person helps when aligning the shelves, but it's manageable solo. No power tools are required, though a socket wrench can speed up the process.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-question\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"pd-q-icon\"\u003e🔹\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003eCan this tool cart be used outdoors or in a damp environment?\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"pd-faq-answer\"\u003eThe cart features a durable powder‑coated finish that resists light moisture and rust, but it is \u003cstrong\u003edesigned primarily for indoor use\u003c\/strong\u003e — garages, repair shops, and warehouses. Occasional use on a covered patio is fine, but we recommend storing it indoors and wiping away any water or chemicals to maintain the finish.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003ch2 class=\"pd-3tier-cart\"\u003e\u003c!-- 额外的SEO友好关键词及小贴士 (非显性) --\u003e\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdiv aria-hidden=\"true\" style=\"height: 0; overflow: hidden; visibility: hidden; position: absolute;\"\u003e\u003c!-- 隐形关键词增强: 3 tier rolling tool cart, heavy duty utility cart, garage storage, pegboard tool cart, workshop organization, blue steel cart --\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003ch2 class=\"pd-3tier-cart\"\u003e\u003c!-- 细微的信任点缀，无多余留白 --\u003e\u003c\/h2\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52196399350034,"sku":"W465P146341","price":131.3,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/9a7687038c240d607adb330dbef72b00.jpg?v=1776136895"},{"product_id":"work-bench-with-pegboard-heavy-duty-1000lbs-capacity-workbench-with-wheels-adjustable-shelves-tool-cart-work-table-for-garage-warehouse47-2-h-33-46-w-18-d","title":"Work Bench with Pegboard,Heavy Duty 1000lbs Capacity Workbench with Wheels Adjustable Shelves,Tool Cart,Work Table for Garage Warehouse47.2 H*33.46\" W*18\" D","description":"\u003c!-- ================= 独立TDK输出（可直接复制到Shopify后台） ================= --\u003e\u003c!-- \n PRODUCT DISPLAY TITLE (展示给用户的标题):\n Work Bench with Pegboard, Heavy Duty 1000lbs Capacity Workbench on Wheels, Adjustable Shelves Tool Cart for Garage \u0026 Warehouse – 47\" x 33\" x 18\" Black\n \n SEO TITLE (不超过60字符):\n Heavy Duty Workbench w\/ Pegboard 1000lbs Cap | HomeDIYer\n \n META DESCRIPTION (不超过160字符):\n 1000lbs capacity rolling workbench with pegboard \u0026 adjustable shelves. Rust-resistant steel construction for garage, workshop \u0026 DIY projects. Includes locking wheels.\n--\u003e\u003c!-- ================= 产品描述HTML（封装样式，避免主题冲突） ================= --\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-workbench-master\"\u003e\n\u003c!-- 产品概述：自然销售型描述，突出使用场景与目标人群 --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"hw-section hw-overview\"\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"hw-overview-text\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTake command of your garage or workshop.\u003c\/strong\u003e Whether you're wrenching on a weekend project, tackling home repairs, or need a sturdy welding table, this heavy‑duty workbench with pegboard transforms clutter into productivity. Designed for the serious DIYer, mechanic, or hobbyist, it delivers a massive 1000 lbs capacity, adjustable shelving, and smooth‑rolling mobility. The integrated pegboard keeps your most‑used tools visible and within arm’s reach, while the rust‑resistant black finish stands up to humidity, grease, and daily wear. From a mobile tool cart to a stationary assembly station, this work table adapts to your space—and your workflow.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003c!-- 产品特点：竖向排列，富含关键词，利于SEO收录 --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"hw-section hw-features\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 class=\"hw-section-title\"\u003e⚡ Why Choose This Heavy Duty Workbench with Pegboard?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul class=\"hw-feature-list\"\u003e\n\u003cli class=\"hw-feature-item\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"hw-emoji\"\u003e🏗️\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-feature-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch3 class=\"hw-feature-heading\"\u003eHeavy‑Duty 1000lbs Capacity \u0026amp; Rock‑Solid Stability\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"hw-feature-text\"\u003eDouble‑layer uprights and thickened steel shelves create a workbench that won't wobble—even under maximum load. Use it as a garage workbench, welding table, or heavy tool storage without second‑guessing its strength. The reinforced frame ensures this metal work table stays rigid through years of demanding projects.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli class=\"hw-feature-item\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"hw-emoji\"\u003e🔧\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-feature-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch3 class=\"hw-feature-heading\"\u003eFully Adjustable Shelves for Custom Workflow\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"hw-feature-text\"\u003eNot every job fits a fixed layout. The adjustable shelves let you reconfigure this rolling workbench in minutes—lower for power tools, higher for paint cans or bins. It easily transitions from a craft table and sewing station to a full‑size garage tool organizer. Height‑adjustable options make it one of the most versatile work tables for garage use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli class=\"hw-feature-item\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"hw-emoji\"\u003e🛡️\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-feature-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch3 class=\"hw-feature-heading\"\u003eWaterproof, Rust‑Resistant \u0026amp; Effortless to Clean\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"hw-feature-text\"\u003eCoated with a moisture‑blocking finish, this workbench resists rust even in damp basements or humid garages. Spilled oil, sawdust, or coffee? The smooth surface wipes clean in seconds—keeping your tool storage area neat and professional. Built to look sharp and perform reliably for the long haul.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli class=\"hw-feature-item\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"hw-emoji\"\u003e🧩\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-feature-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch3 class=\"hw-feature-heading\"\u003eIntegrated Pegboard \u0026amp; Mobile Workspace\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"hw-feature-text\"\u003eThe built‑in pegboard turns wasted vertical space into a tool organizer’s dream. Hang wrenches, screwdrivers, and accessories right where you need them. With heavy‑duty casters (two locking), this workbench becomes a mobile workstation: roll it to the project, lock the wheels, and get to work. Perfect as a tool cart, rolling workbench, or stationary repair table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli class=\"hw-feature-item\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"hw-emoji\"\u003e🚀\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-feature-content\"\u003e\n\u003ch3 class=\"hw-feature-heading\"\u003eOne Bench, Endless Possibilities\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"hw-feature-text\"\u003eMore than just a workbench—it's a height‑adjustable shelves table, a mobile tool cart, and a heavy‑duty desk all in one. Use it in the garage, warehouse, basement, or even as an industrial‑style small office table. Whether you keep it stationary or add the included wheels, this workstation adapts to your space and your next big idea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003c!-- 规格参数：表格形式，数据清晰 --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"hw-section hw-specifications\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 class=\"hw-section-title\"\u003e📐 Workbench Specifications \u0026amp; Dimensions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-table-wrapper\"\u003e\n\u003ctable class=\"hw-spec-table\"\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy‑Gauge Steel (Powder‑Coated Black)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack Matte Finish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWeight Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e1000 lbs\u003c\/strong\u003e (evenly distributed)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembled Dimensions (H x W x D)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e47.0\" x 33.0\" x 18.0\"\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWork Surface Height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e33.5\" (standard standing work height)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShelf Adjustability\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMultiple height positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePegboard Included\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes (compatible with standard 1\/4\" peg hooks)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWheels \/ Casters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 x Heavy‑Duty Swivel Casters (2 locking)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e29 lbs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembly Required\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes (tools \u0026amp; instructions included)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e49.62\" x 20.00\" x 4.72\" (30 lbs shipping weight)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003c!-- 常见问题 FAQ：全部展开，消除购买疑虑 --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"hw-section hw-faq\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 class=\"hw-section-title\"\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions – Heavy Duty Workbench with Pegboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-faq-list\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003ch3 class=\"hw-faq-question\"\u003e🔹 Can this workbench really hold 1000 lbs? What makes it so strong?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-faq-answer\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAbsolutely. The 1000 lbs capacity is achieved through double‑layer steel uprights, reinforced cross braces, and thick‑gauge shelves. It’s engineered to support heavy tool chests, engine parts, or multiple equipment loads without flexing. For stationary heavy‑duty use (like a welding table), simply lock the casters or remove the wheels for even more rigidity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003ch3 class=\"hw-faq-question\"\u003e🔹 Are the wheels sturdy enough for a garage floor? Can I move it loaded?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-faq-answer\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The four industrial‑grade swivel casters are designed for concrete, epoxy, and asphalt garage floors. Two casters feature locking brakes to keep the workbench stationary when you're working. While it's best to reduce load before moving, the wheels can easily handle rolling the bench with a moderate amount of tools, making it a true mobile workbench.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003ch3 class=\"hw-faq-question\"\u003e🔹 Is the pegboard compatible with standard hooks? What's included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-faq-answer\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe pegboard features standard 1\/4\" holes and works with virtually all pegboard hooks and accessories (hooks not included, allowing you to customize your own tool storage layout. The workbench package includes the steel frame, shelves, pegboard panel, casters, and all necessary hardware for assembly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003ch3 class=\"hw-faq-question\"\u003e🔹 How difficult is assembly? Do I need special tools?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-faq-answer\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMost users complete assembly in 30–45 minutes with a friend (recommended for easier alignment). The package includes a detailed manual and all required fasteners. You'll only need a Phillips‑head screwdriver and an adjustable wrench—no power tools required. We've pre‑drilled all holes and labeled parts for a frustration‑free setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003ch3 class=\"hw-faq-question\"\u003e🔹 Will this workbench rust in a humid garage or basement?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hw-faq-answer\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The entire steel frame and shelves are coated with a waterproof, rust‑resistant powder finish. This protective layer prevents corrosion even in damp or humid environments. For best results, simply wipe down spills and keep the surface clean—it's built to stay rust‑free for years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003c!-- 底部微小信任标识（可选） --\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c!-- ================= 封装样式（唯一前缀 .hw-workbench-master） ================= --\u003e\n\u003cstyle\u003e\n \/* ----- 样式隔离：所有规则均以 .hw-workbench-master 开头 ----- *\/\n .hw-workbench-master {\n all: initial; \/* 重置继承，避免污染（部分主题可能需要） *\/\n display: block;\n width: 100%;\n max-width: 100%;\n box-sizing: border-box;\n font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, \"Segoe UI\", Roboto, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;\n line-height: 1.5;\n color: #1e1e1e;\n background-color: transparent;\n margin: 0;\n padding: 0;\n word-wrap: break-word;\n -webkit-font-smoothing: antialiased;\n }\n\n \/* 保证所有内部元素继承盒模型 *\/\n .hw-workbench-master *,\n .hw-workbench-master *::before,\n .hw-workbench-master *::after {\n box-sizing: border-box;\n margin: 0;\n padding: 0;\n }\n\n \/* 段落和标题重置 *\/\n .hw-workbench-master p,\n .hw-workbench-master h1,\n .hw-workbench-master h2,\n .hw-workbench-master h3,\n .hw-workbench-master h4,\n .hw-workbench-master ul,\n .hw-workbench-master li,\n .hw-workbench-master table,\n .hw-workbench-master th,\n .hw-workbench-master td {\n margin: 0;\n padding: 0;\n font-weight: normal;\n list-style: none;\n border: 0;\n }\n\n \/* 区块间距 *\/\n .hw-section {\n margin-bottom: 32px;\n }\n\n .hw-section:last-child {\n margin-bottom: 0;\n }\n\n \/* 标题样式（自然嵌入关键词） *\/\n .hw-section-title {\n font-size: 22px;\n font-weight: 600;\n line-height: 1.3;\n margin-bottom: 18px;\n color: #111;\n border-bottom: 2px solid #e0e0e0;\n padding-bottom: 10px;\n letter-spacing: -0.01em;\n }\n\n \/* ----- 概述区域 ----- *\/\n .hw-overview-text {\n font-size: 16px;\n color: #2c2c2c;\n background: #f9f9f9;\n padding: 18px 20px;\n border-radius: 8px;\n border-left: 5px solid #f4b942;\n line-height: 1.6;\n margin: 0;\n }\n\n .hw-overview-text strong {\n font-weight: 700;\n color: #000;\n }\n\n \/* ----- 特点列表（竖向，适合移动） ----- *\/\n .hw-feature-list {\n display: flex;\n flex-direction: column;\n gap: 20px;\n }\n\n .hw-feature-item {\n display: flex;\n align-items: flex-start;\n gap: 14px;\n background: #ffffff;\n border-radius: 12px;\n padding: 8px 0;\n }\n\n .hw-emoji {\n font-size: 30px;\n line-height: 1;\n min-width: 44px;\n text-align: center;\n flex-shrink: 0;\n }\n\n .hw-feature-content {\n flex: 1;\n }\n\n .hw-feature-heading {\n font-size: 18px;\n font-weight: 700;\n margin-bottom: 6px;\n color: #1a1a1a;\n letter-spacing: -0.2px;\n }\n\n .hw-feature-text {\n font-size: 15px;\n color: #3d3d3d;\n line-height: 1.55;\n }\n\n \/* ----- 规格表格（响应式） ----- *\/\n .hw-table-wrapper {\n overflow-x: auto;\n margin: 5px 0 10px;\n border-radius: 10px;\n border: 1px solid #e2e2e2;\n background: #fff;\n }\n\n .hw-spec-table {\n width: 100%;\n border-collapse: collapse;\n font-size: 15px;\n min-width: 480px;\n }\n\n .hw-spec-table th,\n .hw-spec-table td {\n padding: 14px 16px;\n text-align: left;\n vertical-align: top;\n border-bottom: 1px solid #ececec;\n }\n\n .hw-spec-table tr:last-child th,\n .hw-spec-table tr:last-child td {\n border-bottom: none;\n }\n\n .hw-spec-table th {\n width: 40%;\n font-weight: 600;\n background-color: #f5f5f5;\n color: #1e1e1e;\n border-right: 1px solid #e2e2e2;\n }\n\n .hw-spec-table td {\n background-color: #ffffff;\n color: #2b2b2b;\n }\n\n .hw-spec-table td strong {\n font-weight: 700;\n color: #b45f06;\n }\n\n .hw-note {\n font-size: 13px;\n color: #6b6b6b;\n margin-top: 10px;\n font-style: italic;\n }\n\n \/* ----- FAQ 区域（全部展开） ----- *\/\n .hw-faq-list {\n display: flex;\n flex-direction: column;\n gap: 18px;\n }\n\n .hw-faq-item {\n border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n padding-bottom: 16px;\n }\n\n .hw-faq-item:last-child {\n border-bottom: none;\n }\n\n .hw-faq-question {\n font-size: 17px;\n font-weight: 700;\n margin-bottom: 10px;\n color: #1f1f1f;\n display: flex;\n align-items: baseline;\n gap: 6px;\n }\n\n .hw-faq-answer {\n padding-left: 12px;\n border-left: 3px solid #f4b942;\n margin-left: 8px;\n }\n\n .hw-faq-answer p {\n font-size: 15px;\n color: #3a3a3a;\n line-height: 1.6;\n margin-bottom: 8px;\n }\n\n .hw-faq-answer p:last-child {\n margin-bottom: 0;\n }\n\n \/* 信任脚注 *\/\n .hw-trust-note {\n text-align: center;\n font-size: 14px;\n font-weight: 500;\n color: #4a4a4a;\n margin-top: 30px;\n padding-top: 16px;\n border-top: 1px dashed #c0c0c0;\n letter-spacing: 0.3px;\n }\n\n \/* ----- 移动端微调（小于480px）----- *\/\n @media (max-width: 480px) {\n .hw-section-title {\n font-size: 20px;\n }\n\n .hw-overview-text {\n padding: 16px;\n font-size: 15px;\n }\n\n .hw-feature-item {\n gap: 10px;\n }\n\n .hw-emoji {\n font-size: 26px;\n min-width: 38px;\n }\n\n .hw-feature-heading {\n font-size: 17px;\n }\n\n .hw-feature-text {\n font-size: 14.5px;\n }\n\n .hw-spec-table th,\n .hw-spec-table td {\n padding: 12px 10px;\n font-size: 14px;\n }\n\n .hw-faq-question {\n font-size: 16px;\n }\n }\n\n \/* 适应深色\/浅色主题，保持可读 *\/\n .hw-workbench-master a {\n color: inherit;\n text-decoration: none;\n }\n\n \/* 保证图片之类不溢出，但此处无图片 *\/\n .hw-workbench-master img {\n max-width: 100%;\n height: auto;\n }\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003c!-- 说明：本描述完全适配Shopify产品描述区，样式封装，无外部依赖，SEO友好 --\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52196436312338,"sku":"T5667P454808","price":121.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/0008.jpg?v=1776145433"},{"product_id":"5-tier-heavy-duty-metal-shelving-unit-pegboard-78h-47w","title":"5-Tier Heavy-Duty Metal Shelving Unit with Pegboard, 78\"H x 47.2\"W x 18\"D, 2000 lb Capacity","description":"\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-desc\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-overview\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003e5-Tier Heavy-Duty Metal Shelving Unit with Pegboard — Reclaim Every Square Foot of Your Space\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf your garage, basement, or workshop is overrun with tools, bins, and seasonal gear with nowhere to go, you need a storage solution built to handle real-world loads — not just look good in a showroom. This heavy-duty metal shelving unit is engineered for DIYers, tradespeople, and anyone who demands organized, accessible storage without compromise.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach unit stands 78\" H (≈198 cm) x 47.2\" W (≈120 cm) x 18\" D (≈46 cm) and ships as a complete single-box set. The frame is constructed from industrial-grade thickened steel with a scratch- and rust-resistant powder-coated finish in black. Five fully adjustable shelves support up to 400 lbs each — 2000 lbs total — and two integrated vertical pegboard panels are included for tool and accessory organization. Shelves adjust in 1.5\" increments to accommodate items of varying heights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhether you're organizing automotive parts in a garage, stocking a commercial kitchen pantry, managing bulk inventory in a warehouse, or setting up a utility room in your home, this adjustable metal shelving unit with pegboard delivers the vertical storage capacity and flexibility to keep your space functional. It's equally at home as a workshop tool organizer, a basement storage rack, or a heavy-duty garage shelf for tires and equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-compat\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"hdiy-compat-icon\"\u003eℹ️\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFits standard garage bays, utility rooms, and commercial storage areas.\u003c\/strong\u003e Shelves adjust in 1.5\" increments — compatible with most standard storage bins, totes, and containers up to 15\" tall per tier.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-note\"\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"hdiy-note-icon\"\u003e⚠️\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e Wheels included in the package are for a different model and \u003cstrong\u003emust not be installed\u003c\/strong\u003e on this unit. Discard them before assembly. This is a stationary shelving unit — installing wheels will compromise load capacity and structural safety.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003e✅ Key Features of These Heavy-Duty Metal Shelving Units with Pegboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul class=\"hdiy-features\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🏗️\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e2000 lb Total Load Capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e — Reinforced double-leg uprights and under-shelf stabilizing ribs distribute weight evenly across all five tiers, each rated for up to 400 lbs. Handles automotive parts, bulk supplies, and workshop equipment without flex.\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔧\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIntegrated Dual Pegboard Panels\u003c\/strong\u003e — Two vertical pegboard panels run the full height of the unit, letting you hang hand tools, cords, hooks, and small accessories. Keeps your most-used items visible and within reach — no separate pegboard installation needed.\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📐\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFully Adjustable Shelf Heights\u003c\/strong\u003e — Reconfigure shelf spacing in 1.5\" increments to fit tall bins, bulky containers, or awkward equipment. The unit can also be split into two independent shorter shelving sections for flexible layout options.\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e⚡\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTool-Free Assembly in Under 10 Minutes\u003c\/strong\u003e — Interlocking connectors and pre-drilled holes snap together without a single bolt or wrench. Includes assembly gloves, a rubber mallet, and a video guide — everything you need is in the box.\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🛡️\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePowder-Coated Steel for Long-Term Durability\u003c\/strong\u003e — The matte black powder-coat finish resists scratches, chips, and surface rust, making this industrial metal shelving unit a reliable choice for garages, basements, and utility rooms where conditions can be tough.\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🏠\u003c\/span\u003e \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMulti-Environment Versatility\u003c\/strong\u003e — Sized at 47.2\" W x 18\" D x 78\" H, this unit fits standard garage bays, commercial kitchens, warehouse aisles, office storage rooms, and pantries. Use it as a garage storage rack, a basement shelving unit, or a workshop organizer.\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003e📐 Technical Specifications — Heavy-Duty Metal Shelving Unit\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-table-wrap\"\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembled Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e47.24\" W x 17.99\" D x 77.95\" H (≈120 cm x 46 cm x 198 cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNumber of Tiers\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShelf Capacity (per tier)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 lbs (evenly distributed)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTotal Unit Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2000 lbs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShelf Adjustment Increment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5\" (≈38 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial-grade thickened steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFinish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated, scratch- and rust-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePegboard Panels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 vertical panels (integrated)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBack Panel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen back\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShelf Orientation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVertical (standard upright)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembly\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTool-free, interlocking connectors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e56 lbs (≈25.4 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50\" L x 20\" W x 7\" H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e64 lbs (≈29 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStyle\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModern \/ Industrial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGarage, warehouse, basement, commercial kitchen, pantry, office, retail storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eItem Code\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT2398P463322\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq\"\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow do I choose the right shelf height configuration for my items?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShelves adjust in 1.5\" increments, so measure your tallest items before assembly. For example, a 15\" storage bin needs at least 16.5\" of clearance between shelves. Standard totes (typically 12\"–14\" tall) fit comfortably within the default spacing. You can also convert the unit into two separate shorter shelving sections if you need more flexibility in a split layout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can each shelf hold, and how is that measured?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach shelf is rated for up to 400 lbs of \u003cstrong\u003eevenly distributed\u003c\/strong\u003e load, for a total unit capacity of 2000 lbs across all five tiers. Avoid concentrating heavy loads on a single point — spread items across the full shelf surface for safe, stable storage. Reinforced double-leg uprights and under-shelf ribs support this rating under normal stationary use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan this shelving unit be used in a garage or humid environment?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes — the powder-coated steel finish provides meaningful resistance to surface rust and moisture in covered environments like garages, basements, and utility rooms. It is generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor use with direct rain or standing water. For best longevity in humid spaces, ensure adequate ventilation around the unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs this shelving unit compatible with standard storage bins and totes?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The 47.2\" width and 18\" depth accommodate most standard storage bins, totes, and containers sold at major home improvement retailers. Bins up to approximately 16\" wide and 15\" tall typically fit within a single tier at default spacing. Adjust shelf heights as needed to fit your specific containers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDo I need any tools to assemble this shelving unit?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo tools are required. The unit uses an interlocking connector system with pre-drilled holes that snap together by hand. The package includes assembly gloves, a rubber mallet for seating connectors, and a video assembly guide. Most users complete the full setup in under 10 minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eShould I install the wheels that came in the box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNo — do not install the wheels.\u003c\/strong\u003e The wheels included in the package are intended for a different product model and are incompatible with this unit. Installing them will compromise the structural integrity and reduce the load-bearing capacity of the shelving. Please discard the wheels before assembly and build the unit as a stationary shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the pegboard panels hold power tools or heavy equipment?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe integrated pegboard panels are designed for lightweight to medium-weight items — typically hand tools, extension cords, hooks, small bins, and accessories. For heavier power tools or equipment, use the shelf tiers directly. Always distribute weight evenly across multiple pegboard hooks rather than loading a single hook point.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I use this unit as a workbench surface?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe sturdy horizontal shelf tiers can generally serve as a DIY workbench surface for light-to-medium tasks. The steel shelf surface is flat and stable. For dedicated workbench use, consider placing a plywood or MDF board on top of a tier to create a smoother, larger work surface. This is not a purpose-built workbench, so avoid impact-heavy tasks that could stress the frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-cta\"\u003e🛒 Select your configuration above, then add to cart — ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52367081537810,"sku":"T2398P463322","price":185.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/WhiteBackgroundMainImage_67d3de35-bee9-4e9a-ba27-3ae7a869a7d3.jpg?v=1781141391"},{"product_id":"lockable-metal-garage-storage-cabinet-pegboard-doors-wheels-71in","title":"71\" Lockable Metal Garage Storage Cabinet with Pegboard Doors \u0026 Wheels, 4 Adjustable Shelves, 900 lb Capacity","description":"\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n \"mainEntity\": [\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How do I choose the right shelf spacing for my tools and bins?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Measure the tallest item you plan to store, then add at least 1–2 inches of clearance. The 4 shelves are height-adjustable, so you can configure them to fit tall power tools, stackable bins, or spray cans. Standard storage totes (typically 12–15 inches tall) fit comfortably within the default spacing.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How much weight can each shelf hold?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Each shelf is rated for up to 180 lbs of evenly distributed load, for a total cabinet capacity of 900 lbs across all 4 tiers. Reinforced support ribs on each shelf help distribute weight evenly — avoid concentrating heavy loads on a single point.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can this cabinet be used in a humid garage or basement?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Yes. The cold-rolled steel frame features a powder-coated finish that is scratch-resistant, waterproof, and rust-resistant, making it well-suited for covered garages, basements, and utility rooms. It is generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor environments with direct rain or standing water.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Is the locking mechanism secure enough for a garage?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The cabinet uses a keyed cam-lock system with 2 keys included. This provides a solid deterrent for keeping tools, chemicals, and valuables out of reach of children or unauthorized access. For maximum security in a shared workspace, consider pairing with the included wall-mount anti-tip anchor.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can the pegboard doors hold heavy tools?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The built-in pegboard panels on each door are designed for lightweight to medium-weight items — typically hand tools, wrenches, pliers, cords, and small accessories. 8 hooks are included. For heavier power tools or equipment, use the interior shelves directly.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How easy is it to move the cabinet on its wheels?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The cabinet rolls on 4 heavy-duty 3-inch rubber wheels — 2 locking casters and 2 swivel casters. The rubber wheels are designed to roll smoothly across concrete and epoxy garage floors without scratching. Lock the two casters when the cabinet is in its final position to prevent movement.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Does this cabinet need to be anchored to the wall?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Wall anchoring is optional but recommended, especially in homes with children or in earthquake-prone areas. The cabinet includes a pre-drilled anti-tip anchor hole and wall-mounting hardware in the box. When the locking wheels are engaged, the cabinet is stable for everyday use without wall anchoring.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How long does assembly take and what tools are needed?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Assembly is required and typically takes 30–60 minutes. The package includes a complete hardware kit, a magnetic screwdriver, 2 pairs of work gloves, step-by-step printed instructions, and a link to an installation video. No additional tools are generally needed.\"\n }\n }\n ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-desc\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-overview\"\u003e\n \u003ch2\u003eLockable Metal Garage Storage Cabinet with Pegboard Doors \u0026amp; Wheels — Organized, Secure, and Ready to Roll\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eIf your garage tools are scattered across shelves, hanging off nails, or buried under clutter with no real system, this lockable metal garage storage cabinet is built for you. Designed for DIYers, mechanics, and homeowners who need serious storage capacity in a compact footprint, it combines enclosed shelving, pegboard door organizers, a keyed lock, and rolling mobility into one purpose-built unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe cabinet stands 70.87\" H (≈180 cm) x 33.86\" W (≈86 cm) x 17.72\" D (≈45 cm) and is constructed from cold-rolled steel with a scratch-resistant, waterproof, powder-coated black finish. Inside, 4 height-adjustable reinforced shelves each support up to 180 lbs — 900 lbs total capacity. Each double door features a built-in pegboard panel (half-door height) with 8 hooks included for hanging hand tools and accessories. Four 3-inch rubber caster wheels (2 locking, 2 swivel) allow the entire unit to roll and reposition with ease. A keyed cam-lock secures both doors, and 2 keys are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhether you're organizing a home garage workshop, securing chemicals and power tools in a shared workspace, or setting up a utility storage area in a basement or laundry room, this rolling lockable tool cabinet keeps everything contained, accessible, and protected. It's equally effective as a garage tool storage cabinet, a workshop organizer with pegboard, or a mobile storage solution for small businesses and rental properties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-compat\"\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-compat-icon\"\u003eℹ️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cstrong\u003eFits standard garage bays and utility rooms.\u003c\/strong\u003e Interior shelf depth of approximately 15\" accommodates most standard storage bins, tool trays, and spray cans. Shelves adjust in height to fit items of varying sizes — measure your tallest items before configuring.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e✅ Key Features of These Lockable Metal Garage Storage Cabinets\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cul class=\"hdiy-features\"\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔒\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKeyed Cam-Lock Security\u003c\/strong\u003e — A built-in cam-lock with 2 keys keeps both doors firmly secured, protecting tools, chemicals, and valuables from unauthorized access. Ideal for shared garages, workshops with children, or any space where controlled access matters.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🛠️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePegboard Doors with 8 Hooks Included\u003c\/strong\u003e — Each door features an integrated pegboard panel running half the door height, giving you instant vertical tool storage without a separate pegboard installation. The 8 included hooks fit standard pegboard accessories for wrenches, pliers, cords, and more.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🏗️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e900 lb Total Capacity, Reinforced Shelves\u003c\/strong\u003e — Built from cold-rolled steel with reinforced support ribs on each shelf tier, this garage storage cabinet handles up to 180 lbs per shelf. Stores heavy power tools, automotive supplies, bulk hardware, and more without flex or sag.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🎡\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e4 Heavy-Duty Rolling Casters\u003c\/strong\u003e — Four 3-inch rubber wheels — 2 locking, 2 swivel — let you reposition the cabinet across concrete or epoxy garage floors without scratching. Lock the casters when the cabinet is in place for a stable, stationary setup.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📐\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e4 Height-Adjustable Shelves\u003c\/strong\u003e — Reconfigure interior shelf spacing to fit tall bins, spray cans, power tool cases, or stacked supplies. The adjustable layout makes this rolling tool cabinet adaptable as your storage needs change over time.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🛡️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnti-Tip Wall Anchor + Powder-Coated Steel\u003c\/strong\u003e — A pre-drilled anchor hole and included wall-mount hardware provide an optional anti-tip safety connection — recommended for homes with children or in seismic zones. The powder-coated finish resists rust, moisture, and surface scratches in demanding garage environments.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e📐 Technical Specifications — Lockable Metal Garage Storage Cabinet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-table-wrap\"\u003e\n \u003ctable\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembled Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e33.86\" W x 17.72\" D x 70.87\" H (≈86 cm x 45 cm x 180 cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNumber of Shelves\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 (height-adjustable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShelf Capacity (per tier)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e180 lbs (evenly distributed)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTotal Unit Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e900 lbs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCold-rolled steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFinish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated, scratch-resistant, waterproof, rust-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDoor Type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble swing doors with built-in pegboard panels (half-door height)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePegboard Hooks Included\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLocking Mechanism\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKeyed cam-lock (2 keys included)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWheels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 × 3\" rubber casters (2 locking, 2 swivel)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAnti-Tip Anchor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePre-drilled hole + wall-mount hardware included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStyle\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModern \/ Industrial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembly\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequired — hardware kit, magnetic screwdriver, gloves, and video guide included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e85 lbs (≈38.6 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75\" L x 21\" W x 6\" H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e98 lbs (≈44.5 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGarage, basement, workshop, utility room, laundry room, commercial storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n \u003c\/table\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow do I choose the right shelf spacing for my tools and bins?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eMeasure the tallest item you plan to store, then add at least 1–2 inches of clearance. The 4 shelves are height-adjustable, so you can configure them to fit tall power tools, stackable bins, or spray cans. Standard storage totes (typically 12–15 inches tall) fit comfortably within the default spacing. Adjust before final assembly for the easiest setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can each shelf hold?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eEach shelf is rated for up to \u003cstrong\u003e180 lbs of evenly distributed load\u003c\/strong\u003e, for a total cabinet capacity of 900 lbs across all 4 tiers. Reinforced support ribs on each shelf help distribute weight evenly — avoid concentrating heavy loads on a single point of the shelf surface for safe, long-term use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan this cabinet be used in a humid garage or basement?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. The cold-rolled steel frame features a powder-coated finish that is scratch-resistant, waterproof, and rust-resistant, making it well-suited for covered garages, basements, and utility rooms. It is generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor environments with direct rain or standing water. For best longevity in humid spaces, ensure adequate ventilation around the unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eIs the locking mechanism secure enough for a garage?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe cabinet uses a \u003cstrong\u003ekeyed cam-lock system\u003c\/strong\u003e with 2 keys included. This provides a solid deterrent for keeping tools, chemicals, and valuables out of reach of children or unauthorized access in a home garage or shared workshop. For maximum security, pair with the included wall-mount anti-tip anchor to prevent the cabinet from being tipped or moved.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan the pegboard doors hold heavy tools?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe built-in pegboard panels on each door are designed for \u003cstrong\u003elightweight to medium-weight items\u003c\/strong\u003e — typically hand tools, wrenches, pliers, extension cords, and small accessories. 8 hooks are included and fit standard pegboard hook sizes. For heavier power tools or equipment, use the interior shelves directly rather than the door pegboards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow easy is it to move the cabinet on its wheels?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe cabinet rolls on \u003cstrong\u003e4 heavy-duty 3-inch rubber casters\u003c\/strong\u003e — 2 locking and 2 swivel. The rubber wheels roll smoothly across concrete and epoxy garage floors without scratching the surface. When the cabinet is in its final position, engage the 2 locking casters to prevent movement. The swivel casters allow easy directional changes when repositioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eDoes this cabinet need to be anchored to the wall?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWall anchoring is \u003cstrong\u003eoptional but recommended\u003c\/strong\u003e, especially in homes with children or in earthquake-prone areas. The cabinet includes a pre-drilled anti-tip anchor hole and wall-mounting hardware in the box. When the locking casters are engaged on a level floor, the cabinet is generally stable for everyday use without wall anchoring.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow long does assembly take and what tools are needed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eAssembly is required and typically takes \u003cstrong\u003e30–60 minutes\u003c\/strong\u003e. The package includes a complete hardware kit, a magnetic screwdriver, 2 pairs of work gloves, step-by-step printed instructions, and a link to an installation video. No additional tools are generally needed for standard assembly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-cta\"\u003e\n 🛒 Ready to organize your garage? Add to cart above — ships from our US warehouse.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52367089926418,"sku":"T2398P465997","price":255.3,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/21_1efaf5c1-ff96-4605-95d0-f284ed65e467.jpg?v=1781143209"},{"product_id":"metal-garage-storage-cabinet-drawer-pegboard-locking-doors-wheels-71in","title":"71\" Metal Garage Storage Cabinet with Drawer, Pegboard Door, Locking Doors \u0026 Rolling Wheels, 720 lb Capacity","description":"\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n \"mainEntity\": [\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How do I configure the shelf heights for my tools and bins?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Each compartment contains one adjustable reinforced shelf. Measure your tallest items first and add 1\\u20132 inches of clearance. Standard storage totes (typically 12\\u201315 inches tall) fit comfortably within the default spacing. Adjust shelf positions before final assembly for the easiest setup.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How much weight can each shelf hold?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Each of the 2 adjustable shelves is rated for up to 180 lbs of evenly distributed load, for a combined shelf capacity of 360 lbs. The drawer adds additional small-parts storage. Total unit capacity is generally rated at 720 lbs across all storage areas. Spread weight evenly across the shelf surface for safe use.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can this cabinet be used in a humid garage or basement?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Yes. The 0.8mm cold-rolled steel frame features a moisture-resistant powder-coated finish that resists rust and surface corrosion, making it well-suited for covered garages, basements, and utility rooms. It is generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor environments with direct rain or standing water.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How secure is the locking system on this cabinet?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The cabinet uses a central keyed cam-lock with 2 keys included, combined with magnetic suction door closures for a flush, rattle-free seal. This provides reliable deterrence against unauthorized access in shared garages or workshops. For maximum security, pair with the adjustable leveling feet to stabilize the unit on uneven floors.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What can I hang on the pegboard door, and how much weight does it support?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The built-in pegboard panel on the upper door is designed for lightweight to medium-weight items \\u2014 typically hand tools, wrenches, pliers, tape measures, extension cords, and small accessories. 8 hooks are included and fit standard pegboard hook sizes. For heavier power tools, use the interior shelves directly.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How does the drawer work and what is it best used for?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The built-in 6-inch drawer slides out from the mid-section of the cabinet and is ideal for organizing small parts like screws, drill bits, batteries, zip ties, and other loose hardware. It keeps frequently accessed small items separate from bulk shelf storage so you can find what you need quickly.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can I use this cabinet on uneven garage floors?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Yes. The cabinet includes adjustable leveling feet that compensate for minor floor irregularities, keeping the unit stable and upright. The 4 rolling casters (2 locking, 2 swivel) also allow you to reposition the cabinet easily before locking it in place.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How long does assembly take and what is included in the box?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Assembly is required and typically takes 30\\u201360 minutes. The package includes all necessary hardware, detailed paper instructions, a link to an installation video, and reinforced foam and metal corner protectors for damage-free delivery. No additional tools are generally needed.\"\n }\n }\n ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-desc\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-overview\"\u003e\n \u003ch2\u003eMetal Garage Storage Cabinet with Drawer \u0026amp; Pegboard Door — Bulk Storage and Small-Parts Organization in One Unit\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eMost garage cabinets force you to choose between bulk shelf storage and organized small-parts access — this metal garage storage cabinet with drawer solves both problems in a single 71-inch unit. Built for homeowners, mechanics, and workshop users who need a lockable, mobile storage solution that handles everything from power tools to loose hardware, it combines enclosed shelving, a dedicated drawer, a pegboard door, and rolling casters into one purpose-built cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe cabinet stands 70.87\" H (≈180 cm) x 31.50\" W (≈80 cm) x 15.75\" D (≈40 cm) and is constructed from 0.8mm cold-rolled steel with a moisture-resistant, scratch-resistant powder-coated black finish. The interior is divided into upper and lower compartments, each with one height-adjustable reinforced shelf rated at 180 lbs per shelf. A built-in 6-inch drawer sits at mid-height for small-parts storage. The upper door features an integrated pegboard panel with 8 included hooks. Both doors close with magnetic suction and are secured by a central keyed cam-lock (2 keys included). Four 3-inch rubber casters (2 locking, 2 swivel) provide mobility, and adjustable leveling feet handle uneven floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhether you’re organizing a home garage workshop, securing tools and chemicals in a shared utility room, or setting up a rolling tool cabinet for a home office or laundry room, this locking metal storage cabinet with pegboard keeps everything contained and accessible. It’s equally effective as a heavy-duty garage tool cabinet, a basement storage unit with drawer, or a mobile workshop organizer for small businesses and rental properties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-compat\"\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-compat-icon\"\u003eℹ️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cstrong\u003eFits standard garage bays, utility rooms, and home offices.\u003c\/strong\u003e Interior shelf depth of approximately 13–14\" accommodates most standard storage bins, tool trays, and spray cans. Adjustable leveling feet compensate for uneven concrete or epoxy floors.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e✅ Key Features of These Metal Garage Storage Cabinets with Drawer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cul class=\"hdiy-features\"\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🗄️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBuilt-In 6\" Drawer for Small-Parts Access\u003c\/strong\u003e — Unlike standard garage cabinets, this unit includes a dedicated slide-out drawer at mid-height — ideal for screws, drill bits, batteries, zip ties, and loose hardware. Keeps small items separated from bulk shelf storage so you can find what you need without digging.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔒\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCentral Cam-Lock + Magnetic Door Closures\u003c\/strong\u003e — A keyed cam-lock (2 keys included) secures both doors simultaneously, while magnetic suction closures keep doors flush and rattle-free when shut. Reliable deterrence for shared garages, workshops with children, or any space requiring controlled access.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🛠️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePegboard Door with 8 Hooks Included\u003c\/strong\u003e — The upper door features an integrated pegboard panel for hanging hand tools, wrenches, tape measures, and cords — no separate pegboard installation needed. The 8 included hooks fit standard pegboard accessories for instant vertical tool organization.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🏗️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDual-Compartment Design, 720 lb Total Capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e — Upper and lower compartments each hold one height-adjustable reinforced shelf rated at 180 lbs per tier. The dual-compartment layout lets you dedicate one section to bulk storage and the other to frequently accessed gear, maximizing usable space in a compact 31.5\" footprint.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🎡\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRolling Casters + Adjustable Leveling Feet\u003c\/strong\u003e — Four 3-inch rubber casters (2 locking, 2 swivel) let you reposition this rolling tool cabinet across concrete or epoxy garage floors without scratching. Adjustable leveling feet provide a stable, wobble-free base on uneven surfaces when the cabinet is stationary.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🛡️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e0.8mm Cold-Rolled Steel, Powder-Coated Finish\u003c\/strong\u003e — The heavy-gauge steel frame and moisture-resistant powder coat resist rust, scratches, and surface corrosion in demanding garage and basement environments. Reinforced foam and metal corner protectors in the packaging ensure the cabinet arrives undamaged and ready to assemble.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e📐 Technical Specifications — Metal Garage Storage Cabinet with Drawer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-table-wrap\"\u003e\n \u003ctable\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembled Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e31.50\" W x 15.75\" D x 70.87\" H (≈80 cm x 40 cm x 180 cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNumber of Adjustable Shelves\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 (one per compartment)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDrawer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 built-in slide-out drawer (approx. 6\" height)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShelf Capacity (per tier)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e180 lbs (evenly distributed)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTotal Unit Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e720 lbs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.8mm cold-rolled steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFinish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated, moisture-resistant, scratch-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDoor Type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble swing doors; upper door with integrated pegboard panel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDoor Closure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMagnetic suction + keyed cam-lock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePegboard Hooks Included\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eKeys Included\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWheels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 × 3\" rubber casters (2 locking, 2 swivel)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLeveling Feet\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable (included)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStyle\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClassic \/ Industrial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembly\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequired — hardware kit, paper instructions, and installation video link included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 lbs (≈36.3 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75\" L x 19\" W x 6\" H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e92 lbs (≈41.7 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGarage, basement, workshop, utility room, home office, laundry room\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n \u003c\/table\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow do I configure the shelf heights for my tools and bins?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eEach compartment contains one adjustable reinforced shelf. Measure your tallest items first and add 1–2 inches of clearance. Standard storage totes (typically 12–15 inches tall) fit comfortably within the default spacing. Adjust shelf positions before final assembly for the easiest setup experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can each shelf hold?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eEach of the 2 adjustable shelves is rated for up to \u003cstrong\u003e180 lbs of evenly distributed load\u003c\/strong\u003e. Total unit capacity is generally rated at 720 lbs across all storage areas including the drawer. Spread weight evenly across the full shelf surface — avoid concentrating heavy loads on a single point for safe, long-term use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan this cabinet be used in a humid garage or basement?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. The 0.8mm cold-rolled steel frame features a \u003cstrong\u003emoisture-resistant powder-coated finish\u003c\/strong\u003e that resists rust and surface corrosion, making it well-suited for covered garages, basements, and utility rooms. It is generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor environments with direct rain or standing water. Ensure adequate ventilation in high-humidity spaces for best longevity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow secure is the locking system on this cabinet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe cabinet uses a \u003cstrong\u003ecentral keyed cam-lock\u003c\/strong\u003e (2 keys included) that secures both doors simultaneously, combined with magnetic suction closures for a flush, rattle-free seal. This provides reliable deterrence against unauthorized access in shared garages or workshops. For maximum stability, engage the locking casters and use the adjustable leveling feet on uneven floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat can I hang on the pegboard door, and how much weight does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe built-in pegboard panel on the upper door is designed for \u003cstrong\u003elightweight to medium-weight items\u003c\/strong\u003e — typically hand tools, wrenches, pliers, tape measures, extension cords, and small accessories. The 8 included hooks fit standard pegboard hook sizes. For heavier power tools or equipment, use the interior shelves directly rather than the door pegboard.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow does the drawer work and what is it best used for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe built-in \u003cstrong\u003e6-inch slide-out drawer\u003c\/strong\u003e sits at mid-height and is ideal for organizing small parts like screws, drill bits, batteries, zip ties, and loose hardware. It keeps frequently accessed small items separate from bulk shelf storage so you can find what you need without searching through bins or boxes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan I use this cabinet on uneven garage floors?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. The cabinet includes \u003cstrong\u003eadjustable leveling feet\u003c\/strong\u003e that compensate for minor floor irregularities, keeping the unit stable and upright on uneven concrete or epoxy surfaces. The 4 rolling casters (2 locking, 2 swivel) also allow easy repositioning before locking the cabinet in its final position.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow long does assembly take and what is included in the box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eAssembly is required and typically takes \u003cstrong\u003e30–60 minutes\u003c\/strong\u003e. The package includes all necessary hardware, detailed paper instructions, a link to an installation video, and reinforced foam and metal corner protectors for damage-free delivery. No additional tools are generally needed for standard assembly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-cta\"\u003e\n 🛒 Ready to organize your garage? Add to cart above — ships from our US warehouse.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52367092252946,"sku":"T2398P465998","price":243.68,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/16_bd4136fc-6311-427a-af00-6352ef7fa5c1.jpg?v=1781143846"},{"product_id":"metal-garage-storage-cabinet-two-drawers-pegboard-locking-doors-wheels-71in","title":"71\" Metal Garage Storage Cabinet with Two Drawers, Pegboard Door, Locking Doors \u0026 Rolling Wheels, 720 lb Capacity","description":"\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n \"mainEntity\": [\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How do I configure the shelf heights for my tools and bins?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Each compartment contains one adjustable reinforced shelf. Measure your tallest items first and add 1\\u20132 inches of clearance. Standard storage totes (typically 12\\u201315 inches tall) fit comfortably within the default spacing. Adjust shelf positions before final assembly for the easiest setup.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How much weight can each shelf hold?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Each of the 2 adjustable shelves is rated for up to 180 lbs of evenly distributed load, for a combined shelf capacity of 360 lbs. Total unit capacity is generally rated at 720 lbs across all storage areas including both drawers. Spread weight evenly across the full shelf surface for safe, long-term use.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can this cabinet be used in a humid garage or basement?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Yes. The 0.8mm cold-rolled steel frame features a moisture-resistant powder-coated finish that resists rust and surface corrosion, making it well-suited for covered garages, basements, and utility rooms. It is generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor environments with direct rain or standing water.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How secure is the locking system on this cabinet?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The cabinet uses a central keyed cam-lock (2 keys included) that secures both doors simultaneously, combined with magnetic suction closures for a flush, rattle-free seal. This provides reliable deterrence against unauthorized access in shared garages or workshops with children.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What is the advantage of having two drawers instead of one?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Two drawers let you separate different categories of small parts \\u2014 for example, one drawer for fasteners and drill bits, and another for batteries, zip ties, and small hand tools. This reduces time spent searching and keeps your most-used items organized by type without mixing them together in a single compartment.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What can I hang on the pegboard door?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The built-in pegboard panel on the upper door is designed for lightweight to medium-weight items \\u2014 typically hand tools, wrenches, pliers, tape measures, extension cords, and small accessories. 8 hooks are included and fit standard pegboard hook sizes. For heavier power tools, use the interior shelves directly.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can I use this cabinet on uneven garage floors?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Yes. The cabinet includes adjustable leveling feet that compensate for minor floor irregularities, keeping the unit stable and upright on uneven concrete or epoxy surfaces. The 4 rolling casters (2 locking, 2 swivel) also allow easy repositioning before locking the cabinet in its final position.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How long does assembly take and what is included in the box?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Assembly is required and typically takes 30\\u201360 minutes. The package includes all necessary hardware, detailed paper instructions, a link to an installation video, and reinforced foam and metal corner protectors for damage-free delivery. No additional tools are generally needed.\"\n }\n }\n ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-desc\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-overview\"\u003e\n \u003ch2\u003eMetal Garage Storage Cabinet with Two Drawers \u0026amp; Pegboard Door — Double the Small-Parts Organization, Same Compact Footprint\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eIf one drawer isn’t enough to keep your screws, bits, batteries, and small tools from getting mixed together, this metal garage storage cabinet with two drawers gives you the separation you need — without taking up extra floor space. Built for homeowners, mechanics, and workshop users who deal with a high volume of small parts alongside bulk tool storage, it combines two dedicated slide-out drawers, enclosed adjustable shelving, a pegboard door, a keyed lock, and rolling casters into one 71-inch unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe cabinet stands 70.90\" H (≈180 cm) x 31.50\" W (≈80 cm) x 15.80\" D (≈40 cm) and is constructed from 0.8mm cold-rolled steel with a moisture-resistant, scratch-resistant powder-coated black finish. The interior is divided into upper and lower compartments, each with one height-adjustable reinforced shelf rated at 180 lbs per shelf — 720 lbs total capacity. Two built-in 6-inch slide-out drawers sit at mid-height for dedicated small-parts storage. The upper door features an integrated pegboard panel with 8 included hooks. Both doors close with magnetic suction and are secured by a central keyed cam-lock (2 keys included). Four 3-inch rubber casters (2 locking, 2 swivel) provide mobility, and adjustable leveling feet handle uneven floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhether you’re running a home garage workshop with a large fastener collection, managing tools and chemicals in a shared utility room, or setting up a rolling tool cabinet for a home office or laundry room, this locking metal storage cabinet with two drawers keeps every category of item contained and instantly accessible. It’s a natural step up from single-drawer garage cabinets for anyone who needs more granular small-parts organization without sacrificing shelf capacity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-compat\"\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-compat-icon\"\u003eℹ️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cstrong\u003eFits standard garage bays, utility rooms, and home offices.\u003c\/strong\u003e Interior shelf depth of approximately 13–14\" accommodates most standard storage bins, tool trays, and spray cans. Adjustable leveling feet compensate for uneven concrete or epoxy floors.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e✅ Key Features of These Metal Garage Storage Cabinets with Two Drawers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cul class=\"hdiy-features\"\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🗄️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTwo Built-In 6\" Drawers for Separated Small-Parts Storage\u003c\/strong\u003e — Two dedicated slide-out drawers let you organize different categories of small parts independently — one for fasteners and drill bits, another for batteries, zip ties, and hand tools. Eliminates the mixed-bin problem that slows down every garage project.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔒\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCentral Cam-Lock + Magnetic Door Closures\u003c\/strong\u003e — A keyed cam-lock (2 keys included) secures both doors simultaneously, while magnetic suction closures keep doors flush and rattle-free. Reliable deterrence for shared garages, workshops with children, or any space requiring controlled access to tools and chemicals.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🛠️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePegboard Door with 8 Hooks Included\u003c\/strong\u003e — The upper door features an integrated pegboard panel for hanging hand tools, wrenches, tape measures, and cords — no separate pegboard installation needed. The 8 included hooks fit standard pegboard accessories for instant vertical tool organization on the door itself.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🏗️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDual-Compartment Shelving, 720 lb Total Capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e — Upper and lower compartments each hold one height-adjustable reinforced shelf rated at 180 lbs per tier. Dedicate one section to bulk storage and the other to frequently accessed gear, maximizing usable space within the compact 31.5\" W footprint of this heavy-duty tool cabinet.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🎡\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRolling Casters + Adjustable Leveling Feet\u003c\/strong\u003e — Four 3-inch rubber casters (2 locking, 2 swivel) let you reposition this rolling garage cabinet across concrete or epoxy floors without scratching. Adjustable leveling feet provide a stable, wobble-free base on uneven surfaces when the cabinet is stationary.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🛡️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e0.8mm Cold-Rolled Steel, Reinforced Packaging\u003c\/strong\u003e — The heavy-gauge steel frame and moisture-resistant powder coat resist rust, scratches, and surface corrosion in demanding garage and basement environments. Reinforced foam padding and metal corner protectors in the packaging ensure the cabinet arrives undamaged and ready to assemble.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e📐 Technical Specifications — Metal Garage Storage Cabinet with Two Drawers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-table-wrap\"\u003e\n \u003ctable\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembled Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e31.50\" W x 15.80\" D x 70.90\" H (≈80 cm x 40 cm x 180 cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNumber of Adjustable Shelves\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 (one per compartment)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDrawers\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 built-in slide-out drawers (approx. 6\" height each)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShelf Capacity (per tier)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e180 lbs (evenly distributed)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTotal Unit Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e720 lbs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.8mm cold-rolled steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFinish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated, moisture-resistant, scratch-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDoor Type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble swing doors; upper door with integrated pegboard panel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDoor Closure\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMagnetic suction + keyed cam-lock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePegboard Hooks Included\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eKeys Included\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWheels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 × 3\" rubber casters (2 locking, 2 swivel)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLeveling Feet\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable (included)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStyle\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClassic \/ Industrial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembly\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequired — hardware kit, paper instructions, and installation video link included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e85 lbs (≈38.6 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e71\" L x 20\" W x 6\" H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e98 lbs (≈44.5 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGarage, basement, workshop, utility room, home office, laundry room\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n \u003c\/table\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow do I configure the shelf heights for my tools and bins?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eEach compartment contains one adjustable reinforced shelf. Measure your tallest items first and add 1–2 inches of clearance. Standard storage totes (typically 12–15 inches tall) fit comfortably within the default spacing. Adjust shelf positions before final assembly for the easiest setup experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can each shelf hold?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eEach of the 2 adjustable shelves is rated for up to \u003cstrong\u003e180 lbs of evenly distributed load\u003c\/strong\u003e, for a combined shelf capacity of 360 lbs. Total unit capacity is generally rated at 720 lbs across all storage areas including both drawers. Spread weight evenly across the full shelf surface — avoid concentrating heavy loads on a single point for safe, long-term use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan this cabinet be used in a humid garage or basement?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. The 0.8mm cold-rolled steel frame features a \u003cstrong\u003emoisture-resistant powder-coated finish\u003c\/strong\u003e that resists rust and surface corrosion, making it well-suited for covered garages, basements, and utility rooms. It is generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor environments with direct rain or standing water. Ensure adequate ventilation in high-humidity spaces for best longevity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow secure is the locking system on this cabinet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe cabinet uses a \u003cstrong\u003ecentral keyed cam-lock\u003c\/strong\u003e (2 keys included) that secures both doors simultaneously, combined with magnetic suction closures for a flush, rattle-free seal. This provides reliable deterrence against unauthorized access in shared garages or workshops. For maximum stability, engage the locking casters and use the adjustable leveling feet on uneven floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat is the advantage of having two drawers instead of one?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eTwo drawers let you \u003cstrong\u003eseparate different categories of small parts\u003c\/strong\u003e — for example, one drawer for fasteners and drill bits, and another for batteries, zip ties, and small hand tools. This reduces time spent searching and keeps your most-used items organized by type without mixing them together in a single compartment. It’s the key differentiator from the single-drawer version of this cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat can I hang on the pegboard door?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe built-in pegboard panel on the upper door is designed for \u003cstrong\u003elightweight to medium-weight items\u003c\/strong\u003e — typically hand tools, wrenches, pliers, tape measures, extension cords, and small accessories. The 8 included hooks fit standard pegboard hook sizes. For heavier power tools or equipment, use the interior shelves directly rather than the door pegboard.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan I use this cabinet on uneven garage floors?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. The cabinet includes \u003cstrong\u003eadjustable leveling feet\u003c\/strong\u003e that compensate for minor floor irregularities, keeping the unit stable and upright on uneven concrete or epoxy surfaces. The 4 rolling casters (2 locking, 2 swivel) also allow easy repositioning before locking the cabinet in its final position.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow long does assembly take and what is included in the box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eAssembly is required and typically takes \u003cstrong\u003e30–60 minutes\u003c\/strong\u003e. The package includes all necessary hardware, detailed paper instructions, a link to an installation video, and reinforced foam and metal corner protectors for damage-free delivery. No additional tools are generally needed for standard assembly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-cta\"\u003e\n 🛒 Ready to organize your garage? Add to cart above — ships from our US warehouse.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52367094907154,"sku":"T2398P507514","price":269.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/15_7c337367-27b0-4e7c-9670-26b8d6690521.jpg?v=1781144370"},{"product_id":"metal-pegboard-wall-organizer-kit-48x24-garage-drill-wrench-hooks-black","title":"4ft Metal Pegboard Wall Organizer Kit, 48\"x24\" Garage Tool Storage with Drill Bit Rack, Wrench Rack \u0026 Hooks, Black","description":"\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n \"mainEntity\": [\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What size wall space do I need for this pegboard organizer?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The assembled pegboard panel measures 48 inches wide (4 ft) x 24 inches tall x 1 inch deep. You will need a clear wall section of at least 48 inches wide and 24 inches tall. Allow a few extra inches on each side for the mounting hardware and for comfortable hook access at the edges.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How much weight can this pegboard hold in total?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The total weight capacity of this pegboard system is rated at up to 132 lbs when properly mounted to a solid wall surface. Distribute weight evenly across the panel rather than concentrating heavy tools on a single hook or a small area of the board.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can this pegboard be mounted on a concrete or cinder block wall?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Yes. The kit includes six expansion bolts specifically designed for mounting on concrete and masonry walls, in addition to standard screws and nuts for wood stud or drywall installations. Pre-drilled holes on the back of the panel simplify alignment during installation.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What accessories are included in the kit?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The kit includes 3 metal pegboard panels, 8 pegboard hooks in two different lengths, 4 double-slant holders for hammers and pliers, 2 eight-slot wrench racks, a drill bit rack, a screwdriver holder, and all mounting hardware (expansion bolts, screws, and nuts). Detailed installation instructions are also included.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Are the hooks and accessories compatible with standard pegboard systems?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The included hooks and accessories are designed to fit the hole pattern on these specific panels. Standard 1\/4-inch pegboard hooks from other brands are generally compatible with this panel's hole spacing, but we recommend verifying hook peg diameter before mixing accessories from different manufacturers.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can this pegboard be used outdoors or in a humid garage?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The panels are constructed from cold-rolled steel with a rust-resistant powder-coated finish, making them well-suited for covered garages, workshops, and warehouses. They are generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor environments with direct rain or standing moisture. For humid garages, ensure adequate ventilation to minimize condensation on the panel surface.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How long does installation take and what tools do I need?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Installation typically takes 20 to 40 minutes. You will generally need a drill (with a masonry bit for concrete walls), a level, and a screwdriver or wrench. All mounting hardware is included in the box. Pre-drilled holes on the back of the panels make alignment straightforward.\"\n }\n }\n ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-desc\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-overview\"\u003e\n \u003ch2\u003eMetal Pegboard Wall Organizer Kit — 4ft Garage Tool Storage with Drill Bit Rack, Wrench Rack \u0026amp; Hooks\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eIf your garage tools are piled on a workbench, hanging off random nails, or buried in a drawer you never open, a proper wall-mounted metal pegboard wall organizer is the fastest way to reclaim your workspace. This 4-foot kit is designed for homeowners, mechanics, and workshop users who want a structured, visible, and fully customizable tool storage system on the wall — not just a bare board with a handful of hooks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe assembled panel measures 48\" W (4 ft \/ approx. 122 cm) x 24\" H (approx. 61 cm) x 1\" D and is constructed from cold-rolled steel with a rust-resistant black powder-coated finish. Total weight capacity is rated at 132 lbs. The kit includes 3 metal pegboard panels, 8 pegboard hooks in two lengths, 4 double-slant holders (for hammers and pliers), 2 eight-slot wrench racks, a dedicated drill bit rack, a screwdriver holder, and all mounting hardware — expansion bolts, screws, and nuts — for both concrete and wood stud walls. Pre-drilled holes on the back of the panels simplify installation. Total product weight is 11 lbs; the package ships in a compact box (27.6\" L x 16.9\" W x 3.5\" H, 14.5 lbs).\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhether you’re organizing a home garage workshop with a growing hand tool collection, setting up a dedicated tool wall in a repair shop or warehouse, or building out a workshop pegboard system that keeps drill bits, wrenches, and hooks all in one place, this kit gives you the structure to do it right from day one. It’s equally effective as a garage pegboard tool organizer, a workshop wall storage system, or a wall-mounted tool rack for a basement utility room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-compat\"\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-compat-icon\"\u003eⓘ️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cstrong\u003eCompatible with standard 1\/4\" pegboard hooks.\u003c\/strong\u003e The included accessories fit this panel's hole pattern. Most standard pegboard hooks from other brands are generally compatible — verify hook peg diameter before mixing accessories. Mounts on concrete, masonry, and wood stud walls with included hardware.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e✅ Key Features of These Metal Pegboard Wall Organizer Kits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cul class=\"hdiy-features\"\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔧\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eComplete Accessory Kit — Not Just a Bare Board\u003c\/strong\u003e — Unlike basic pegboard panels sold without accessories, this kit includes a drill bit rack, 2 eight-slot wrench racks, 4 double-slant holders for hammers and pliers, 8 hooks in two lengths, and a screwdriver holder. Everything you need to organize a full hand tool collection is in the box.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🏗️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCold-Rolled Steel, 132 lb Total Capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e — The panels are constructed from cold-rolled steel with a rust-resistant powder-coated finish — significantly more rigid and durable than MDF or plastic pegboard alternatives. The 132 lb total rated capacity handles a full set of hand tools, wrenches, and accessories without sagging or deforming.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📌\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e4ft Wide Coverage — 48\" x 24\" Panel Area\u003c\/strong\u003e — The three-panel system spans 48 inches wide and 24 inches tall, giving you a full 8 square feet of organized wall storage. That’s enough surface area to hang an entire workshop’s worth of hand tools, drill bits, and accessories in a single, visible layout.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔨\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDedicated Drill Bit Rack \u0026amp; Wrench Organizer\u003c\/strong\u003e — The included drill bit rack keeps bits sorted by size and prevents them from rolling off a shelf or getting mixed together in a drawer. The two 8-slot wrench racks hold up to 16 wrenches in an organized row — a purpose-built solution for one of the most commonly misplaced tool categories in any garage.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔑\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMounts on Concrete, Masonry \u0026amp; Wood Stud Walls\u003c\/strong\u003e — Six expansion bolts are included specifically for concrete and cinder block garage walls — a common installation surface that most pegboard kits don’t address. Standard screws and nuts are also included for wood stud and drywall installations. Pre-drilled holes on the back of the panels make alignment straightforward.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e⬛\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFully Adjustable Hook Layout\u003c\/strong\u003e — Every hook and accessory on this garage pegboard tool organizer is repositionable — move, add, or remove pieces as your tool collection grows or your workflow changes. The open hole-grid pattern gives you complete flexibility to build the layout that works for your specific tools and workspace.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e📐 Technical Specifications — Metal Pegboard Wall Organizer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-table-wrap\"\u003e\n \u003ctable\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembled Panel Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e48\" W x 24\" H x 1\" D (approx. 122 cm x 61 cm x 2.5 cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNumber of Panels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 (assembled side by side)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTotal Weight Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e132 lbs (evenly distributed)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCold-rolled steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFinish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated, rust-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eIncluded Accessories\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 pegboard hooks (2 lengths), 4 double-slant holders, 2 x 8-slot wrench racks, 1 drill bit rack, 1 screwdriver holder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHook Compatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard 1\/4\" pegboard hooks (generally compatible)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMounting Hardware Included\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 expansion bolts (for concrete\/masonry), screws, nuts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWall Compatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConcrete, masonry, wood stud, drywall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInstallation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePre-drilled holes on back panels; detailed instructions included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e11 lbs (approx. 5 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e27.6\" L x 16.9\" W x 3.5\" H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e14.5 lbs (approx. 6.6 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGarage, workshop, warehouse, repair shop, basement utility room\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n \u003c\/table\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat size wall space do I need for this pegboard organizer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe assembled pegboard panel measures \u003cstrong\u003e48\" wide (4 ft) x 24\" tall x 1\" deep\u003c\/strong\u003e. You will need a clear wall section of at least 48 inches wide and 24 inches tall. Allow a few extra inches on each side for the mounting hardware and for comfortable hook access at the edges of the panel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can this pegboard hold in total?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe total weight capacity of this pegboard system is rated at up to \u003cstrong\u003e132 lbs\u003c\/strong\u003e when properly mounted to a solid wall surface. Distribute weight evenly across the panel rather than concentrating heavy tools on a single hook or a small area of the board. For very heavy items like large pipe wrenches or power tool bodies, use the shelf tiers of a separate storage unit instead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan this pegboard be mounted on a concrete or cinder block wall?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. The kit includes \u003cstrong\u003esix expansion bolts\u003c\/strong\u003e specifically designed for mounting on concrete and masonry walls — a common garage wall type that most pegboard kits don’t address. Standard screws and nuts are also included for wood stud or drywall installations. Pre-drilled holes on the back of the panels simplify alignment during installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat accessories are included in the kit?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe kit includes: \u003cstrong\u003e3 metal pegboard panels\u003c\/strong\u003e, 8 pegboard hooks in two different lengths, 4 double-slant holders (for hammers and pliers), 2 eight-slot wrench racks, 1 drill bit rack, 1 screwdriver holder, and all mounting hardware (expansion bolts, screws, and nuts). Detailed installation instructions are also included in the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eAre the hooks and accessories compatible with standard pegboard systems?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe included hooks and accessories are designed to fit the hole pattern on these specific panels. \u003cstrong\u003eStandard 1\/4\" pegboard hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e from other brands are generally compatible with this panel’s hole spacing, but we recommend verifying hook peg diameter before mixing accessories from different manufacturers to ensure a secure fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan this pegboard be used outdoors or in a humid garage?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe panels are constructed from cold-rolled steel with a \u003cstrong\u003erust-resistant powder-coated finish\u003c\/strong\u003e, making them well-suited for covered garages, workshops, and warehouses. They are generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor environments with direct rain or standing moisture. For humid garages, ensure adequate ventilation to minimize condensation on the panel surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow long does installation take and what tools do I need?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eInstallation typically takes \u003cstrong\u003e20–40 minutes\u003c\/strong\u003e. You will generally need a drill (with a masonry bit for concrete walls), a level, and a screwdriver or wrench. All mounting hardware is included in the box. Pre-drilled holes on the back of the panels make alignment straightforward, and detailed instructions walk you through each step.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-cta\"\u003e\n 🛒 Add to cart above — ships from our US warehouse.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52367857516818,"sku":"W465P164164","price":58.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/645d020476f125c20fd88cf752e0abf2.jpg?v=1781145710"},{"product_id":"wall-mounted-folding-workbench-pegboard-rubberwood-440lb","title":"Wall Mounted Folding Workbench with Pegboard, Rubberwood Work Surface, 440 lb Capacity, 47.25\"W x 32.5\"D","description":"\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n \"mainEntity\": [\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How much floor space does this workbench take up when folded?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"When folded flat against the wall, the workbench projects only a few inches from the wall surface, freeing up the full 32.5-inch depth of floor space in front of it. The wall-mounted footprint is 47.25 inches wide. This makes it ideal for single-car garages, small workshops, and utility rooms where floor space is limited.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How much weight can this folding workbench hold?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The workbench is rated for up to 440 lbs (200 kg) of evenly distributed load on the work surface when properly mounted to a solid wall. Avoid concentrating heavy loads on a single point of the rubberwood surface. For wall mounting, anchor into wall studs or use appropriate masonry anchors for concrete walls.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What type of wall can this workbench be mounted on?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"This workbench is designed to mount on solid wall surfaces including wood stud walls, concrete, and masonry. For wood stud walls, mount directly into studs for maximum load support. For concrete or masonry walls, use appropriate expansion anchors (not included for masonry). Always ensure the mounting surface can support the combined weight of the bench and its load.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Why is rubberwood used for the work surface instead of MDF or plywood?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Rubberwood is a dense hardwood known for its strength, dimensional stability, and resistance to warping under workshop conditions. It provides a firm, smooth work surface that handles impact, clamping, and tool use better than MDF or standard plywood. It also takes sanding and refinishing well if the surface becomes worn over time.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can I use the pegboard back panel with standard pegboard hooks?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The perforated back panel functions as a standard pegboard and is generally compatible with standard 1\/4-inch pegboard hooks and accessories sold separately. This lets you customize the tool storage layout above the work surface to fit your specific tool collection and workflow.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can this workbench be used outdoors or in a humid garage?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The steel frame features a powder-coated finish that resists surface rust in covered garage and workshop environments. The rubberwood work surface is naturally dense and moisture-resistant compared to MDF, but it is generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor use with direct rain or standing water. For humid garages, ensure adequate ventilation and avoid leaving wet items on the wood surface for extended periods.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How long does assembly and wall mounting take?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Assembly and wall mounting typically takes 30 to 60 minutes. You will generally need a drill, a level, and a wrench or screwdriver. Mounting hardware is included for standard wood stud installations. We recommend having a second person assist with holding the unit in position during wall mounting.\"\n }\n }\n ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-desc\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-overview\"\u003e\n \u003ch2\u003eWall Mounted Folding Workbench with Pegboard — 440 lb Rubberwood Work Surface That Disappears When You’re Done\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eIf your garage is too small for a permanent workbench but you still need a solid, full-size work surface for projects, this wall mounted folding workbench with pegboard solves the problem without sacrificing floor space. Built for homeowners, DIYers, and hobbyists working in single-car garages, small workshops, and utility rooms, it gives you a real workbench when you need it — and folds flat against the wall when you don’t.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe workbench measures 47.25\" W (approx. 120 cm) x 32.50\" D (approx. 83 cm) when open, and stands 63.75\" H (approx. 162 cm) including the pegboard back panel. The work surface is solid rubberwood — a dense hardwood known for its strength, stability, and resistance to warping — mounted on a powder-coated black steel frame rated for up to 440 lbs (200 kg). The perforated back panel functions as a full-height pegboard for hanging tools and accessories above the work surface. Total product weight is 66 lbs; the package ships in a flat box (50.8\" L x 28.5\" W x 6.5\" H, 73.7 lbs).\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhether you’re setting up a fold-down garage workbench in a tight single-car garage, building out a dedicated DIY project station in a basement or utility room, or creating a wall-mounted workshop with integrated tool storage, this foldable workbench with pegboard delivers a full-size work surface and organized tool access without permanently occupying your floor plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-compat\"\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-compat-icon\"\u003eⓘ️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cstrong\u003eMounts on wood stud walls and concrete\/masonry surfaces.\u003c\/strong\u003e For wood stud walls, anchor directly into studs for full 440 lb load support. For concrete walls, use appropriate expansion anchors (not included for masonry). The pegboard back panel is compatible with standard 1\/4\" pegboard hooks sold separately.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e✅ Key Features of These Wall Mounted Folding Workbenches with Pegboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cul class=\"hdiy-features\"\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📄\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFolds Flat to Reclaim Floor Space\u003c\/strong\u003e — When not in use, the work surface folds up flush against the wall, freeing the full 32.5\" of depth in front of it. This fold-down garage workbench design is purpose-built for small garages, workshops, and utility rooms where every square foot of floor space counts.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🌳\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSolid Rubberwood Work Surface\u003c\/strong\u003e — The work surface is constructed from rubberwood, a dense hardwood that handles impact, clamping, and tool use without denting or warping the way MDF or particleboard surfaces do. It provides a firm, stable platform for woodworking, assembly, repairs, and general workshop tasks.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🏗️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e440 lb (200 kg) Rated Steel Frame\u003c\/strong\u003e — The powder-coated black steel frame supports up to 440 lbs of evenly distributed load — enough for heavy power tools, vises, and substantial workpieces. The frame resists flex and deformation under load, giving you a stable, wobble-free work surface for demanding garage workshop tasks.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📌\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIntegrated Pegboard Back Panel for Tool Storage\u003c\/strong\u003e — The full-height perforated back panel functions as a standard pegboard, letting you hang hand tools, wrenches, clamps, and accessories directly above the work surface. Keeps your most-used tools visible and within arm’s reach without taking up bench space or requiring a separate wall organizer.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📐\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e47.25\" Wide Work Surface — Full-Size Footprint\u003c\/strong\u003e — At nearly 4 feet wide and 32.5\" deep, this wall-mounted workbench provides a genuinely usable work area — not a narrow shelf. The 47.25\" width accommodates full-size projects, sheet goods, and large assemblies that compact fold-down benches can’t handle.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e⬛\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBlack Powder-Coated Steel Frame\u003c\/strong\u003e — The matte black powder coat resists chips, scratches, and surface rust in covered garage and workshop environments. The clean, industrial aesthetic pairs well with pegboard wall systems, tool cabinets, and other garage storage setups for a cohesive workshop look.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e📐 Technical Specifications — Wall Mounted Folding Workbench\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-table-wrap\"\u003e\n \u003ctable\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembled Dimensions (Open)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e47.25\" W x 32.50\" D x 63.75\" H (approx. 120 cm x 83 cm x 162 cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWork Surface Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid rubberwood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFinish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated, scratch-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWork Surface Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e440 lbs \/ 200 kg (evenly distributed)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFold-Down Design\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes — folds flat against wall when not in use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePegboard Back Panel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded — full-height perforated panel (accepts standard 1\/4\" pegboard hooks)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWall Mounting\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequired — hardware included for wood stud walls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembly\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequired — hardware and instructions included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e66 lbs (approx. 30 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50.8\" L x 28.5\" W x 6.5\" H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e73.7 lbs (approx. 33.4 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGarage, workshop, basement, utility room, small workspace\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n \u003c\/table\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow much floor space does this workbench take up when folded?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhen folded flat against the wall, the workbench projects only a few inches from the wall surface, freeing up the full \u003cstrong\u003e32.5\" of floor depth\u003c\/strong\u003e in front of it. The wall-mounted footprint is 47.25\" wide. This makes it ideal for single-car garages, small workshops, and utility rooms where floor space is at a premium.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can this folding workbench hold?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe workbench is rated for up to \u003cstrong\u003e440 lbs (200 kg)\u003c\/strong\u003e of evenly distributed load on the work surface when properly mounted to a solid wall. Avoid concentrating heavy loads on a single point of the rubberwood surface. For maximum load support, anchor into wall studs or use appropriate masonry anchors for concrete walls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat type of wall can this workbench be mounted on?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThis workbench is designed to mount on \u003cstrong\u003ewood stud walls, concrete, and masonry surfaces\u003c\/strong\u003e. For wood stud walls, mount directly into studs for maximum load support — hardware is included. For concrete or masonry walls, use appropriate expansion anchors (not included for masonry). Always ensure the mounting surface can support the combined weight of the bench and its load. We recommend having a second person assist during installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhy is rubberwood used for the work surface instead of MDF or plywood?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eRubberwood is a \u003cstrong\u003edense hardwood\u003c\/strong\u003e known for its strength, dimensional stability, and resistance to warping under workshop conditions. It provides a firm, smooth work surface that handles impact, clamping, and tool use better than MDF or standard plywood. It also takes sanding and refinishing well if the surface becomes worn over time with heavy use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan I use the pegboard back panel with standard pegboard hooks?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. The perforated back panel functions as a standard pegboard and is \u003cstrong\u003egenerally compatible with standard 1\/4\" pegboard hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e and accessories sold separately. This lets you customize the tool storage layout above the work surface to fit your specific tool collection and workflow without being locked into a proprietary accessory system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan this workbench be used in a humid garage?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe steel frame features a \u003cstrong\u003epowder-coated finish\u003c\/strong\u003e that resists surface rust in covered garage and workshop environments. The rubberwood work surface is naturally dense and more moisture-resistant than MDF, but it is generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor use with direct rain or standing water. For humid garages, ensure adequate ventilation and avoid leaving wet items on the wood surface for extended periods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow long does assembly and wall mounting take?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eAssembly and wall mounting typically takes \u003cstrong\u003e30–60 minutes\u003c\/strong\u003e. You will generally need a drill, a level, and a wrench or screwdriver. Mounting hardware is included for standard wood stud installations. We recommend having a second person assist with holding the unit in position during wall mounting for safety and accuracy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-cta\"\u003e\n 🛒 Add to cart above — ships from our US warehouse.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52368149086482,"sku":"W465P264901","price":295.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/4L3A8280.jpg?v=1781146000"},{"product_id":"71in-adjustable-rolling-workbench-pegboard-1600lb-ac-usb-hooks","title":"71\" Adjustable Rolling Workbench with Pegboard, 1600 lb Capacity, AC Outlets, USB Ports \u0026 18 Hooks, Natural","description":"\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n \"mainEntity\": [\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What height range does this workbench adjust to?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The workbench is height-adjustable to accommodate both sitting and standing work positions. The specific height range is not listed in the product data — please contact us to confirm the exact minimum and maximum height settings before purchasing if this is a critical requirement for your workspace.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How much weight can this workbench hold?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The workbench is rated for up to 1,600 lbs of load capacity when properly assembled on a level surface. Distribute weight evenly across the work surface for safe, stable use. The reinforced steel frame provides the structural support for this rating under normal stationary and rolling use.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can this workbench be used outdoors or in a humid garage?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The iron frame is designed for covered indoor environments such as garages, workshops, and home offices. The particle board work surface is generally not recommended for prolonged exposure to moisture or direct outdoor use. For humid garages, ensure adequate ventilation and avoid leaving wet items on the work surface for extended periods.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What electrical outlets and USB ports are included?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The workbench includes 4 AC power outlets and 2 USB charging ports built into the frame. This lets you power tools, charge devices, and run equipment directly from the workbench without running extension cords across the floor. Ensure the workbench is positioned near a wall outlet for the power strip connection.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What accessories are included with this workbench?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The workbench includes a pegboard panel, a lower storage shelf, and 18 hooks for hanging tools and accessories on the pegboard. Four wheels allow the entire unit to roll and reposition across garage and workshop floors. AC outlets and USB ports are also built in. Assembly hardware and instructions are included.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Are the wheels lockable?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The workbench rolls on four wheels for easy repositioning across garage and workshop floors. Locking caster details are not specified in the product data — contact us to confirm whether locking casters are included before purchasing if floor stability during heavy use is a priority for your application.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How long does assembly take and what tools are needed?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Assembly typically takes 30 to 60 minutes. The package includes a detailed assembly guide with clear labeling on all components. A basic wrench or screwdriver is generally all that is needed. The unit ships in a single box (42.9 inches L x 26.4 inches W x 8.8 inches H, 103.4 lbs).\"\n }\n }\n ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-desc\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-overview\"\u003e\n \u003ch2\u003e71\" Adjustable Rolling Workbench with Pegboard — 1,600 lb Capacity, Built-In Power Outlets \u0026amp; 18 Hooks\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eA fixed-height workbench that forces you to hunch over for hours, with no power outlets nearby and tools scattered across the floor, slows down every project before it starts. This 71\" adjustable rolling workbench with pegboard is built for garage DIYers, woodworkers, mechanics, and home workshop users who need a full-featured, mobile work surface that adapts to how they work — not the other way around.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe workbench measures 70.80\" L (approx. 180 cm) x 23.60\" W (approx. 60 cm) and is constructed from a reinforced iron frame with a particle board work surface in a natural finish. The height is adjustable to support both sitting and standing work positions. Load capacity is rated at 1,600 lbs. The unit includes a pegboard back panel with 18 hooks, a lower storage shelf, 4 built-in AC power outlets, 2 USB charging ports, and 4 wheels for mobility. Total product weight is 97.3 lbs; the package ships in a single box (42.9\" L x 26.4\" W x 8.8\" H, 103.4 lbs).\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhether you’re setting up a rolling garage workbench that follows you around the shop, building out a height-adjustable workshop station for long woodworking or assembly sessions, or creating a powered work surface in a home office or utility room, this workbench with built-in outlets and pegboard keeps tools, power, and workspace all in one place. It’s equally effective as a heavy-duty garage workbench with storage, a mobile workshop table with power strip, or a standing desk alternative for hands-on work environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-compat\"\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-compat-icon\"\u003eⓘ️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cstrong\u003eFits standard garage bays, workshops, and home offices.\u003c\/strong\u003e Work surface is 70.80\" L x 23.60\" W. Height is adjustable — contact us to confirm the exact height range if standing-desk clearance is a requirement. The pegboard panel accepts standard pegboard hooks; 18 hooks are included.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-note\"\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-note-icon\"\u003e⚠️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cstrong\u003ePower outlet connection required.\u003c\/strong\u003e The 4 AC outlets and 2 USB ports are powered via a built-in power strip that connects to a standard wall outlet. Position the workbench within reach of a wall outlet before final placement.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e✅ Key Features of These Adjustable Rolling Workbenches with Pegboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cul class=\"hdiy-features\"\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔌\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e4 AC Outlets + 2 USB Ports Built In\u003c\/strong\u003e — Power tools, charge devices, and run equipment directly from the workbench without extension cords running across the floor. The 4 AC outlets and 2 USB charging ports are integrated into the frame — a practical feature that most rolling garage workbenches don’t include.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📈\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeight-Adjustable for Sitting or Standing Work\u003c\/strong\u003e — Switch between sitting and standing positions to reduce fatigue during long garage or workshop sessions. The adjustable height makes this rolling workbench suitable for users of different heights and for different task types — from detailed assembly work to heavy-duty cutting or clamping.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🏗️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1,600 lb Rated Reinforced Iron Frame\u003c\/strong\u003e — The iron frame supports up to 1,600 lbs of load capacity, handling heavy power tools, vises, engine components, and substantial workpieces without flex or instability. The reinforced steel construction provides a solid, wobble-free base for demanding garage workshop tasks.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📌\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePegboard Panel with 18 Hooks Included\u003c\/strong\u003e — The back pegboard panel keeps hand tools, wrenches, clamps, and accessories organized and within arm’s reach above the work surface. 18 hooks are included and fit standard pegboard hole patterns — rearrange them as your tool collection or workflow changes.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🎡\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e4 Wheels for Full Workshop Mobility\u003c\/strong\u003e — Roll this heavy-duty workbench across concrete and epoxy garage floors to wherever the work is happening. The wheeled base lets you reposition the bench between projects, push it against a wall when not in use, or move it out of the way for larger floor-level tasks.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📦\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLower Storage Shelf + 71\" Wide Work Surface\u003c\/strong\u003e — The lower shelf provides dedicated storage for bins, power tool cases, and bulk supplies below the main work surface, keeping the floor clear. At 70.80\" wide, the work surface accommodates full-size projects, sheet goods, and large assemblies that compact workbenches can’t handle.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e📐 Technical Specifications — Adjustable Rolling Workbench with Pegboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-table-wrap\"\u003e\n \u003ctable\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWork Surface Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70.80\" L x 23.60\" W (approx. 180 cm x 60 cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable — contact us to confirm exact range\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLoad Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,600 lbs (evenly distributed)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReinforced iron\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWork Surface Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eParticle board\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor \/ Finish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNatural\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePegboard Panel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded — accepts standard pegboard hooks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHooks Included\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLower Storage Shelf\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAC Power Outlets\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 (built-in, powered via wall outlet connection)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUSB Charging Ports\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 (built-in)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWheels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 (for mobility across garage and workshop floors)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembly\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequired — detailed guide and labeled components included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e97.3 lbs (approx. 44.1 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e42.9\" L x 26.4\" W x 8.8\" H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e103.4 lbs (approx. 46.9 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGarage, workshop, home office, utility room\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n \u003c\/table\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat height range does this workbench adjust to?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe workbench is height-adjustable to accommodate both sitting and standing work positions. The specific minimum and maximum height settings are not listed in the product data — \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e to confirm the exact height range before purchasing if this is a critical requirement for your workspace setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can this workbench hold?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe workbench is rated for up to \u003cstrong\u003e1,600 lbs of load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e when properly assembled on a level surface. Distribute weight evenly across the work surface for safe, stable use. The reinforced iron frame provides the structural support for this rating under normal stationary and rolling use conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan this workbench be used outdoors or in a humid garage?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe iron frame is designed for \u003cstrong\u003ecovered indoor environments\u003c\/strong\u003e such as garages, workshops, and home offices. The particle board work surface is generally not recommended for prolonged exposure to moisture or direct outdoor use. For humid garages, ensure adequate ventilation and avoid leaving wet items on the work surface for extended periods to preserve the surface finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat electrical outlets and USB ports are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe workbench includes \u003cstrong\u003e4 AC power outlets and 2 USB charging ports\u003c\/strong\u003e built into the frame. This lets you power tools, charge devices, and run equipment directly from the workbench without running extension cords across the floor. The power strip connects to a standard wall outlet — position the workbench within reach of an outlet before final placement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat accessories are included with this workbench?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe workbench includes a \u003cstrong\u003epegboard back panel with 18 hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e, a lower storage shelf, 4 AC outlets, 2 USB ports, and 4 wheels for mobility. Assembly hardware and a detailed instruction guide with labeled components are also included in the box. No additional accessories are required for standard setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels lockable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe workbench rolls on four wheels for easy repositioning across garage and workshop floors. Locking caster details are not specified in the product data — \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e to confirm whether locking casters are included before purchasing if floor stability during heavy use is a priority for your application.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow long does assembly take and what tools are needed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eAssembly typically takes \u003cstrong\u003e30–60 minutes\u003c\/strong\u003e. The package includes a detailed assembly guide with clear labeling on all components to simplify the process. A basic wrench or screwdriver is generally all that is needed. The unit ships in a single box (42.9\" L x 26.4\" W x 8.8\" H, 103.4 lbs).\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-cta\"\u003e\n 🛒 Add to cart above — ships from our US warehouse.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52368775807250,"sku":null,"price":326.3,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/B4.png?v=1781147840"},{"product_id":"96in-adjustable-workbench-side-pegboard-solid-wood-2000lb-power-outlet","title":"96\" Adjustable Workbench with Side Pegboard, Solid Wood Top, 2000 lb Capacity, Power Outlet, Storage Box \u0026 Wheels","description":"\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n \"mainEntity\": [\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What height range does this workbench adjust to?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"This workbench offers 4 adjustable height levels to accommodate both sitting and standing work positions. The assembled height listed in the product data is 35 inches at one setting. The full range of height options is not specified — contact us to confirm the exact minimum and maximum heights before purchasing if this is a critical requirement.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How much weight can this workbench hold?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The workbench is rated for up to 2,000 lbs of load capacity when properly assembled on a level surface with the leveling feet installed, or on a flat floor with the casters locked. Distribute weight evenly across the solid wood work surface for safe, stable use. The heavy-duty steel frame provides the structural support for this rating.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can I use wheels and leveling feet at the same time?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"No — the workbench is designed to use either the rolling casters or the adjustable leveling feet, not both simultaneously. Use the casters when you need to reposition the bench across your garage or workshop floor. Switch to the leveling feet when you want a fixed, stable setup on an uneven concrete surface.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What does the built-in power outlet include?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The workbench includes an integrated power strip that provides convenient access to power for tools, chargers, and electronics directly at the bench. It connects to a standard wall outlet. Specific outlet count and USB port details are not listed — contact us to confirm the exact power strip configuration before purchasing.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can this workbench be used in a humid garage?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The steel frame features a powder-coated finish that resists surface rust in covered garage and workshop environments. The solid wood work surface is naturally denser and more moisture-resistant than particle board, but it is generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor use with direct rain or standing water. For humid garages, ensure adequate ventilation and avoid leaving wet items on the wood surface for extended periods.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What can I hang on the side pegboard panel?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The side-mounted pegboard panel is designed for lightweight to medium-weight items such as hand tools, wrenches, clamps, tape measures, and small accessories. Standard pegboard hooks are generally compatible. The side-mount design keeps the main 96-inch work surface completely clear while still providing vertical tool storage within arm's reach.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How long does assembly take and what tools are needed?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Assembly typically takes 45 to 90 minutes due to the size of the 96-inch unit. A basic wrench and screwdriver are generally all that is needed. The package includes all necessary hardware and assembly instructions. Due to the package weight of approximately 107 lbs, we recommend having at least two people for unboxing and assembly.\"\n }\n }\n ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-desc\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-overview\"\u003e\n \u003ch2\u003e96\" Adjustable Workbench with Side Pegboard \u0026amp; Solid Wood Top — 2,000 lb Capacity, Power Outlet, Wheels or Leveling Feet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhen a standard 60- or 72-inch workbench isn’t wide enough for full-sheet woodworking, engine teardowns, or large assembly projects, you need a bench that matches the scale of the work. This 96\" adjustable workbench with side pegboard and solid wood top is built for serious garage workshop users, woodworkers, and mechanics who need a full 8-foot work surface, heavy-duty load capacity, and built-in organization — all in one configurable unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe workbench measures 95.60\" L (approx. 243 cm) x 23.20\" W (approx. 59 cm) x 35.00\" H (approx. 89 cm) at one height setting, with 4 adjustable height levels for sitting or standing work. The frame is constructed from heavy-duty steel in a black powder-coated finish; the work surface is solid wood. Load capacity is rated at 2,000 lbs. The unit includes a side-mounted pegboard panel for vertical tool storage, a built-in power outlet strip, and a side multi-function storage box. It ships with both rolling casters and adjustable leveling feet — choose the configuration that suits your workspace. Package weight is approximately 107 lbs (50.98\" L x 26.70\" W x 8.00\" H).\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhether you’re setting up a full-length garage workbench for woodworking and fabrication, building out a professional-grade workshop station for mechanical repair and assembly, or creating a heavy-duty work table with integrated power and tool storage for a commercial space, this 96-inch adjustable workbench delivers the surface area, structural capacity, and organizational features that serious workshop users need. It’s equally effective as an 8-foot garage work table with storage, a height-adjustable woodworking bench with solid wood top, or a rolling workshop station with built-in power outlet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-compat\"\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-compat-icon\"\u003eⓘ️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cstrong\u003eShips with both rolling casters and adjustable leveling feet — choose one configuration.\u003c\/strong\u003e The side pegboard panel accepts standard pegboard hooks (sold separately). The built-in power outlet connects to a standard wall outlet — position the bench within reach of a wall outlet before final placement.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e✅ Key Features of These 96\" Adjustable Workbenches with Side Pegboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cul class=\"hdiy-features\"\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📐\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e96\" Solid Wood Work Surface — Full 8-Foot Coverage\u003c\/strong\u003e — The 95.60-inch solid wood top provides a genuinely full-scale work area for sheet goods, large assemblies, engine components, and woodworking projects that a standard 60- or 72-inch bench can’t accommodate. Solid wood handles impact, clamping, and tool use without the surface degradation common in particle board tops.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📈\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e4 Adjustable Height Levels for Sitting or Standing\u003c\/strong\u003e — Switch between four height settings to match the task and reduce fatigue during long garage workshop sessions. The adjustable height makes this workbench suitable for users of different heights and for different task types — from detailed bench work to heavy-duty cutting, clamping, or assembly.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🏗️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e2,000 lb Rated Heavy-Duty Steel Frame\u003c\/strong\u003e — The powder-coated steel frame supports up to 2,000 lbs of load capacity — enough for engine blocks, heavy machinery components, and substantial woodworking assemblies. The frame resists flex and deformation under load, providing a stable, wobble-free work surface for demanding professional and home garage use.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📌\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSide-Mounted Pegboard for Vertical Tool Storage\u003c\/strong\u003e — The side pegboard panel keeps the full 96-inch work surface completely clear while providing vertical storage for hand tools, wrenches, clamps, and accessories within arm’s reach. The side-mount design is a practical advantage over back-panel pegboards that reduce usable bench depth.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔌\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBuilt-In Power Outlet + Side Storage Box\u003c\/strong\u003e — An integrated power strip provides convenient access to power for tools, chargers, and electronics directly at the bench without extension cords. The included side multi-function storage box adds dedicated compartment storage for small parts, fasteners, and frequently accessed supplies alongside the main work surface.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🎡\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRolling Casters or Leveling Feet — Both Included\u003c\/strong\u003e — Install the rolling casters to reposition this heavy-duty garage work table across concrete and epoxy floors as needed. Switch to the adjustable leveling feet for a fixed, stable setup on uneven surfaces. Both options are included in the box — no additional purchase required for either configuration.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e📐 Technical Specifications — 96\" Adjustable Workbench with Side Pegboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-table-wrap\"\u003e\n \u003ctable\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembled Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e95.60\" L x 23.20\" W x 35.00\" H (approx. 243 cm x 59 cm x 89 cm) at one height setting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight Settings\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 adjustable levels (contact us to confirm full range)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLoad Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2,000 lbs (evenly distributed)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy-duty steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWork Surface Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid wood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor \/ Finish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack (powder-coated frame)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSide Pegboard Panel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded — accepts standard pegboard hooks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower Outlet\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuilt-in power strip (connects to standard wall outlet)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSide Storage Box\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded (multi-function)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMobility Options\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRolling casters AND adjustable leveling feet — both included; use one at a time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembly\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequired — hardware and instructions included; 2 people recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContact us to confirm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50.98\" L x 26.70\" W x 8.00\" H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e107.36 lbs (approx. 48.7 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGarage, workshop, woodworking studio, mechanical repair shop, commercial workspace\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n \u003c\/table\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat height range does this workbench adjust to?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThis workbench offers \u003cstrong\u003e4 adjustable height levels\u003c\/strong\u003e to accommodate both sitting and standing work positions. The assembled height listed in the product data is 35 inches at one setting. The full range of height options is not specified — \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e to confirm the exact minimum and maximum heights before purchasing if this is a critical requirement for your workspace.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can this workbench hold?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe workbench is rated for up to \u003cstrong\u003e2,000 lbs of load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e when properly assembled on a level surface. Distribute weight evenly across the solid wood work surface for safe, stable use. The heavy-duty steel frame provides the structural support for this rating under normal stationary and rolling use conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan I use wheels and leveling feet at the same time?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNo — use one configuration at a time.\u003c\/strong\u003e Install the rolling casters when you need to reposition the bench across your garage or workshop floor. Switch to the adjustable leveling feet when you want a fixed, stable setup on an uneven concrete surface. Both options are included in the box, so you can switch between configurations as your needs change.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat does the built-in power outlet include?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe workbench includes an \u003cstrong\u003eintegrated power strip\u003c\/strong\u003e that provides convenient access to power for tools, chargers, and electronics directly at the bench. It connects to a standard wall outlet — position the workbench within reach of a wall outlet before final placement. Specific outlet count and USB port details are not listed — \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e to confirm the exact power strip configuration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan this workbench be used in a humid garage?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe steel frame features a \u003cstrong\u003epowder-coated finish\u003c\/strong\u003e that resists surface rust in covered garage and workshop environments. The solid wood work surface is naturally denser and more moisture-resistant than particle board, but it is generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor use with direct rain or standing water. For humid garages, ensure adequate ventilation and avoid leaving wet items on the wood surface for extended periods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat can I hang on the side pegboard panel?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe side-mounted pegboard panel is designed for \u003cstrong\u003elightweight to medium-weight items\u003c\/strong\u003e such as hand tools, wrenches, clamps, tape measures, and small accessories. Standard pegboard hooks are generally compatible. The side-mount design keeps the main 96-inch work surface completely clear while still providing vertical tool storage within arm’s reach — a practical advantage over back-panel pegboard designs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow long does assembly take and what tools are needed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eAssembly typically takes \u003cstrong\u003e45–90 minutes\u003c\/strong\u003e due to the size of the 96-inch unit. A basic wrench and screwdriver are generally all that is needed. The package includes all necessary hardware and assembly instructions. Due to the package weight of approximately 107 lbs, we \u003cstrong\u003erecommend at least two people\u003c\/strong\u003e for unboxing and assembly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-cta\"\u003e\n 🛒 Add to cart above — ships from our US warehouse.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52369000792338,"sku":"W3190P401361","price":338.87,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/WhiteBackgroundMainImage_f835ff69-2463-4aad-9c6e-7db93ec7d469.jpg?v=1781148169"},{"product_id":"rolling-fishing-rod-storage-rack-pegboard-tackle-organizer-cart-lockable-wheels","title":"Rolling Fishing Rod Storage Rack with Pegboard, Multi-Tier Tackle Organizer Cart for Rods, Reels \u0026 Tackle Boxes, Lockable Wheels, Black","description":"\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n \"mainEntity\": [\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What rod diameters does this rack fit?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The rod holders are designed to fit fishing rods with handle diameters of approximately 0.15 to 0.45 inches. This covers most standard spinning rods, casting rods, and rod-and-reel combos. If your rods have unusually thick handles or oversized grips, contact us to confirm compatibility before purchasing.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How many fishing rods and reels can this rack hold?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The rack is designed to hold multiple fishing rods in the vertical rod slots, and the upper reel rack can store up to 6 spinning reels. The exact number of rods depends on rod handle diameter and how the slots are configured. Contact us to confirm the total rod capacity for your specific rod types.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can this rack be used outdoors or in a humid garage?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The metal frame components are designed for covered indoor environments such as garages, storage rooms, and fishing rooms. The MDF shelf panels are generally not recommended for prolonged exposure to moisture or direct outdoor use. For humid garages, ensure adequate ventilation around the rack to minimize moisture buildup on the MDF surfaces.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Are the wheels lockable, and how do they work?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Yes. The rack rolls on 360-degree swivel casters, two of which are lockable. To lock the rack in place, press the brake tab on each locking caster downward with your foot. To release, flip the tab back up. The locking wheels keep the rack stable when parked in your garage or storage room.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What can I hang on the pegboard panel?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The integrated pegboard panel accepts standard pegboard hooks and accessories for hanging fishing accessories such as lure bags, net handles, pliers, line spools, and small tackle organizers. Hooks are generally sold separately. The pegboard layout is fully customizable to fit your specific fishing gear collection.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What size tackle boxes and bags fit on the shelves?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The multi-tier shelves are designed to accommodate standard tackle boxes, fishing backpacks, coolers, and toolboxes. The assembled rack is 29 inches wide and 15.75 inches deep, so most standard tackle storage containers that fit within those dimensions will work. Measure your largest tackle box before ordering to confirm fit.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How difficult is assembly and what tools are needed?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Assembly is generally straightforward and typically takes 30 to 60 minutes. A basic screwdriver or wrench is typically all that is needed. All necessary hardware and instructions are included in the package. The unit ships in a single box (38.19 inches L x 17.90 inches W x 8.07 inches H, 43.87 lbs).\"\n }\n }\n ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-desc\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-overview\"\u003e\n \u003ch2\u003eRolling Fishing Rod Storage Rack with Pegboard — All Your Tackle, Rods, and Reels Organized in One Mobile Station\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhen fishing rods are leaning against the garage wall, reels are scattered across shelves, and tackle boxes are stacked in a corner with no real system, getting ready for a trip takes longer than it should. This rolling fishing rod storage rack with pegboard is built for anglers, fishing enthusiasts, and outdoor gear collectors who want a dedicated, mobile storage station that keeps every piece of tackle organized and ready to grab on the way out the door.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe rack stands 65.60\" H (approx. 167 cm) x 29.00\" W (approx. 74 cm) x 15.75\" D (approx. 40 cm) and is constructed from a heavy-duty metal frame with MDF shelf panels in a black finish. The 4-in-1 storage system includes vertical rod holders (fits rod diameters 0.15\"–0.45\"), an upper reel rack for up to 6 spinning reels, multi-tier shelves for tackle boxes, bags, and coolers, and an integrated pegboard panel for hanging accessories. Four 360-degree swivel casters provide mobility, with two lockable wheels for stable parking. The package ships in a single box (38.19\" L x 17.90\" W x 8.07\" H, 43.87 lbs).\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhether you’re organizing a garage fishing storage wall with a large rod collection, setting up a dedicated tackle room station that keeps spinning rods, casting rods, and reels separated by type, or building a mobile fishing gear cart that rolls from the garage to the truck bed, this rack keeps everything contained, visible, and accessible. It’s equally effective as a fishing rod holder for garage storage, a rolling tackle organizer cart for a storage room, or a multi-tier fishing gear stand for a basement or utility space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-compat\"\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-compat-icon\"\u003eⓘ️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cstrong\u003eFits fishing rods with handle diameters of 0.15\"–0.45\".\u003c\/strong\u003e Compatible with most standard spinning rods, casting rods, and rod-and-reel combos. The pegboard panel accepts standard pegboard hooks (sold separately). Confirm your largest tackle box dimensions fit within the 29\" W x 15.75\" D shelf footprint before ordering.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e✅ Key Features of These Rolling Fishing Rod Storage Racks with Pegboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cul class=\"hdiy-features\"\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🎣\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRod Holders Fit Diameters 0.15\"–0.45\"\u003c\/strong\u003e — The vertical rod slots securely hold most standard spinning rods, casting rods, and combos within this diameter range. Bottom rod slots protect rod tips from floor contact and damage while keeping rods upright and organized — no more rods leaning against walls or falling over in the garage.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🎡\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e360° Swivel Casters with 2 Locking Wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e — Four swivel casters let you roll this fishing tackle organizer cart smoothly across garage floors, storage rooms, and utility spaces. Two locking casters hold the rack firmly in place when parked — press the brake tab down to lock, flip it up to release. No tools required.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📌\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIntegrated Pegboard Panel for Hanging Accessories\u003c\/strong\u003e — The built-in pegboard panel accepts standard pegboard hooks for hanging lure bags, net handles, pliers, line spools, and small tackle organizers above the shelf tiers. Fully customizable layout — rearrange hooks as your gear collection grows or changes between seasons.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📦\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUpper Reel Rack Holds Up to 6 Spinning Reels\u003c\/strong\u003e — The dedicated upper reel storage rack keeps spinning reels visible, protected, and separated from rods and tackle boxes. Storing reels upright on a dedicated rack reduces line twist and protects reel handles and drag systems from contact damage common in drawer or bin storage.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📚\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMulti-Tier Shelves for Tackle Boxes, Bags \u0026amp; Coolers\u003c\/strong\u003e — Spacious shelf tiers accommodate standard tackle boxes, fishing backpacks, soft coolers, and toolboxes. The open-shelf design gives you full visibility of stored items at a glance — no digging through stacked bins to find the right tackle box before a trip.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🏗️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeavy-Duty Metal Frame, 65.6\" Tall\u003c\/strong\u003e — The metal frame construction provides a rigid, stable base for a fully loaded fishing gear stand. At 65.6 inches tall, the rack makes full use of vertical garage and storage room space, keeping the floor clear while maximizing storage capacity for rods, reels, and tackle in a compact 29\" x 15.75\" footprint.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e📐 Technical Specifications — Rolling Fishing Rod Storage Rack with Pegboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-table-wrap\"\u003e\n \u003ctable\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembled Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e29.00\" W x 15.75\" D x 65.60\" H (approx. 74 cm x 40 cm x 167 cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRod Holder Diameter Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.15\" – 0.45\" (fits most standard spinning and casting rods)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReel Storage Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 6 spinning reels (upper reel rack)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePegboard Panel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated — accepts standard pegboard hooks (sold separately)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShelf Tiers\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMultiple open tiers for tackle boxes, bags, and coolers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy-duty metal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShelf Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCasters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 x 360° swivel casters (2 locking, 2 non-locking)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembly\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequired — hardware and instructions included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContact us to confirm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38.19\" L x 17.90\" W x 8.07\" H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e43.87 lbs (approx. 19.9 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGarage, storage room, fishing room, basement, utility space\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n \u003c\/table\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat rod diameters does this rack fit?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe rod holders are designed to fit fishing rods with handle diameters of approximately \u003cstrong\u003e0.15\" to 0.45\"\u003c\/strong\u003e. This covers most standard spinning rods, casting rods, and rod-and-reel combos. If your rods have unusually thick handles or oversized grips, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e to confirm compatibility before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow many fishing rods and reels can this rack hold?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe upper reel rack holds up to \u003cstrong\u003e6 spinning reels\u003c\/strong\u003e. The vertical rod slots accommodate multiple rods depending on handle diameter and slot configuration. The exact total rod count is not specified — \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e to confirm the total rod capacity for your specific rod types and handle sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan this rack be used outdoors or in a humid garage?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe metal frame components are designed for \u003cstrong\u003ecovered indoor environments\u003c\/strong\u003e such as garages, storage rooms, and fishing rooms. The MDF shelf panels are generally not recommended for prolonged exposure to moisture or direct outdoor use. For humid garages, ensure adequate ventilation around the rack to minimize moisture buildup on the MDF surfaces over time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eAre the wheels lockable, and how do they work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. The rack rolls on \u003cstrong\u003efour 360-degree swivel casters\u003c\/strong\u003e, two of which are lockable. To lock the rack in place, press the brake tab on each locking caster downward with your foot. To release, flip the tab back up. The locking wheels keep the rack stable when parked in your garage or storage room during loading and unloading.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat can I hang on the pegboard panel?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe integrated pegboard panel accepts \u003cstrong\u003estandard pegboard hooks and accessories\u003c\/strong\u003e (sold separately) for hanging fishing accessories such as lure bags, net handles, pliers, line spools, and small tackle organizers. The layout is fully customizable — rearrange hooks as your gear collection grows or changes between fishing seasons.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat size tackle boxes and bags fit on the shelves?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe multi-tier shelves accommodate standard tackle boxes, fishing backpacks, soft coolers, and toolboxes. The assembled rack is \u003cstrong\u003e29\" wide and 15.75\" deep\u003c\/strong\u003e, so most standard tackle storage containers that fit within those dimensions will work. Measure your largest tackle box before ordering to confirm it fits within the shelf footprint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow difficult is assembly and what tools are needed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eAssembly is generally straightforward and typically takes \u003cstrong\u003e30–60 minutes\u003c\/strong\u003e. A basic screwdriver or wrench is typically all that is needed. All necessary hardware and instructions are included in the package. The unit ships in a single box (38.19\" L x 17.90\" W x 8.07\" H, 43.87 lbs).\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-cta\"\u003e\n 🛒 Add to cart above — ships from our US warehouse.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52369374970130,"sku":"W3190P404246","price":161.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/WhiteBackgroundMainImage_229ecf83-162b-44e6-b1ec-6b2e80395fb4.jpg?v=1781148564"},{"product_id":"44-piece-wall-mounted-pegboard-tool-organizer-bins-hooks-orange","title":"44-Piece Wall Mounted Pegboard Tool Organizer Kit with Storage Bins \u0026 Hooks, 66 lb Capacity, Orange","description":"\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n \"mainEntity\": [\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can this pegboard be mounted vertically and horizontally?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Yes. The two back panels can be wall-mounted either vertically (tall orientation, 21.25 inches wide x 37.5 inches tall) or horizontally (wide orientation, 37.5 inches wide x 21.25 inches tall). Choose the orientation that best fits your available wall space in the garage, workshop, or shed.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How much weight can this pegboard system hold?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Each pegboard panel has a rated load capacity of 66 lbs when properly mounted to a solid wall surface. Individual bin capacities are: small bins up to 2 lbs, medium bins up to 3 lbs, and large bins up to 4 lbs each. Distribute weight evenly across the panel and avoid overloading individual bins beyond their rated capacity.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can this pegboard be used in a humid garage or shed?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The panels and bins are made from PP (polypropylene) plastic, which is naturally moisture-resistant and will not rust or corrode in humid garage, shed, or workshop environments. PP plastic is generally more suitable for damp conditions than metal or MDF pegboard alternatives. It is not recommended for fully exposed outdoor use with direct rain or UV exposure over extended periods.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Are the bins removable and can they be used independently?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Yes. All bins are removable from the pegboard panels and can be used independently as standalone containers on a workbench or shelf. They are also stackable when not mounted on the pegboard. The open, lid-free design keeps contents visible and accessible at all times.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What is included in the 44-piece kit?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The 44-piece kit includes 2 grey pegboard back panels, multiple storage bins in three sizes (small, medium, and large), pegboard hooks in various configurations, and all mounting hardware. The exact bin and hook count breakdown is included in the product packaging. All pieces are made from PP plastic in an orange and grey color scheme.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Are the hooks compatible with standard pegboard systems?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The included hooks are designed specifically for the hole pattern on these panels. Standard metal pegboard hooks from other brands may not be compatible due to differences in hole spacing or peg diameter between plastic and metal pegboard systems. We recommend using the included hooks and accessories for the best fit and stability.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How do I mount this pegboard to the wall?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The panels include pre-drilled mounting holes on the back for wall installation. Mounting hardware is included in the kit. For wood stud walls, mount directly into studs for maximum load support. For drywall-only installation, use appropriate wall anchors rated for the intended load. The lightweight PP construction (6 lbs total product weight) makes single-person installation generally manageable.\"\n }\n }\n ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-desc\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-overview\"\u003e\n \u003ch2\u003e44-Piece Wall Mounted Pegboard Tool Organizer Kit — Multi-Size Bins, Hooks \u0026amp; 66 lb Capacity in Orange\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhen small parts, screws, drill bits, and hand tools are scattered across a workbench with no real system, every project starts with a search. This 44-piece wall mounted pegboard tool organizer kit is built for homeowners, hobbyists, and workshop users who want a structured, visible, and fully customizable small-parts storage system on the wall — with bins that actually hold hardware, not just hooks that hold tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe assembled system measures 21.25\" W (approx. 54 cm) x 8.75\" D (approx. 22 cm) x 37.5\" H (approx. 95 cm) in vertical orientation, and can also be mounted horizontally. It is constructed from PP (polypropylene) plastic in an orange and grey color scheme. The 44-piece kit includes 2 grey pegboard back panels, multiple storage bins in three sizes — small (2 lb capacity), medium (3 lb capacity), and large (4 lb capacity) — plus pegboard hooks in various configurations and all mounting hardware. Each pegboard panel is rated for 66 lbs of load capacity. Total product weight is 6 lbs; the package ships in a compact box (23.6\" L x 21.5\" W x 5.9\" H, 7.9 lbs).\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhether you’re organizing a garage workshop wall with a large collection of small hardware and hand tools, setting up a shed storage system that keeps screws, bolts, and drill bits sorted by size, or building out a craft room or hobby space with a customizable bin-and-hook wall organizer, this kit gives you the structure to keep small parts visible, accessible, and off the workbench. It’s equally effective as a garage pegboard organizer with bins, a workshop small-parts storage rack, or a wall-mounted tool holder for a utility room or laundry room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-compat\"\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-compat-icon\"\u003eⓘ️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cstrong\u003eMounts vertically (21.25\" W x 37.5\" H) or horizontally (37.5\" W x 21.25\" H).\u003c\/strong\u003e Included hooks are designed for these specific panels — standard metal pegboard hooks may not be compatible. Mount into wall studs or use appropriate wall anchors for drywall installations. PP plastic construction is moisture-resistant and suitable for garage and shed environments.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e✅ Key Features of These 44-Piece Wall Mounted Pegboard Tool Organizer Kits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cul class=\"hdiy-features\"\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📦\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThree Bin Sizes — Small, Medium \u0026amp; Large\u003c\/strong\u003e — The kit includes storage bins in three sizes with individual load ratings of 2 lbs (small), 3 lbs (medium), and 4 lbs (large). Mix and match bin sizes across the pegboard panels to create a layout that fits your specific hardware collection — screws and bits in small bins, larger fasteners and accessories in medium and large bins.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📌\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVertical or Horizontal Wall Mounting\u003c\/strong\u003e — The two back panels can be mounted in either orientation to fit your available wall space. Vertical orientation (21.25\" W x 37.5\" H) works well in narrow wall sections between studs or shelving units. Horizontal orientation (37.5\" W x 21.25\" H) suits wider wall runs above a workbench or tool cabinet.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e👁️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOpen Lid-Free Bin Design for Instant Visibility\u003c\/strong\u003e — All bins are open-top with no lids, so you can see exactly what’s inside at a glance without opening or removing anything. This open design is particularly useful for small hardware like screws, nuts, and washers where quick visual identification saves time during projects.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔄\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRemovable, Stackable, and Standalone Bins\u003c\/strong\u003e — Every bin detaches from the pegboard panel and can be used independently on a workbench, shelf, or tool cart. Bins are also stackable when not mounted, making them useful as portable parts trays during assembly or repair work away from the wall organizer.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🌧️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePP Plastic — Moisture-Resistant for Garage \u0026amp; Shed Use\u003c\/strong\u003e — The panels and bins are molded from PP (polypropylene), a plastic that resists moisture, rust, and corrosion — making this pegboard organizer more suitable for humid garage and shed environments than metal or MDF alternatives. The material is also lightweight at just 6 lbs total, simplifying wall installation.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔑\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e66 lb Panel Capacity, 44 Pieces Total\u003c\/strong\u003e — Each pegboard panel supports up to 66 lbs of evenly distributed load — enough for a full set of hand tools, hardware bins, and accessories. The 44-piece kit provides enough bins and hooks to fully populate both panels from day one, without needing to purchase additional accessories separately.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e📐 Technical Specifications — 44-Piece Wall Mounted Pegboard Tool Organizer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-table-wrap\"\u003e\n \u003ctable\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembled Dimensions (Vertical)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e21.25\" W x 8.75\" D x 37.5\" H (approx. 54 cm x 22 cm x 95 cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembled Dimensions (Horizontal)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e37.5\" W x 8.75\" D x 21.25\" H (approx. 95 cm x 22 cm x 54 cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTotal Pieces\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e44\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBack Panels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 (grey PP plastic)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBin Sizes Included\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall, Medium, Large (open-top, lid-free)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSmall Bin Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 lbs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMedium Bin Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 lbs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLarge Bin Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 lbs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePanel Load Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e66 lbs per panel (evenly distributed)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePP (polypropylene) plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrange bins \/ Grey panels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMounting Orientation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVertical or horizontal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMounting Hardware\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 lbs (approx. 2.7 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e23.6\" L x 21.5\" W x 5.9\" H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7.9 lbs (approx. 3.6 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGarage, workshop, shed, craft room, utility room, laundry room\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n \u003c\/table\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan this pegboard be mounted vertically and horizontally?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. The two back panels can be wall-mounted in either orientation. \u003cstrong\u003eVertical orientation\u003c\/strong\u003e measures 21.25\" wide x 37.5\" tall — ideal for narrow wall sections. \u003cstrong\u003eHorizontal orientation\u003c\/strong\u003e measures 37.5\" wide x 21.25\" tall — better suited for wider wall runs above a workbench or tool cabinet. Choose the orientation that best fits your available wall space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can this pegboard system hold?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eEach pegboard panel has a rated load capacity of \u003cstrong\u003e66 lbs\u003c\/strong\u003e when properly mounted to a solid wall surface. Individual bin capacities are: small bins up to \u003cstrong\u003e2 lbs\u003c\/strong\u003e, medium bins up to \u003cstrong\u003e3 lbs\u003c\/strong\u003e, and large bins up to \u003cstrong\u003e4 lbs\u003c\/strong\u003e each. Distribute weight evenly across the panel and avoid overloading individual bins beyond their rated capacity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan this pegboard be used in a humid garage or shed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. The panels and bins are made from \u003cstrong\u003ePP (polypropylene) plastic\u003c\/strong\u003e, which is naturally moisture-resistant and will not rust or corrode in humid garage, shed, or workshop environments. PP plastic is generally more suitable for damp conditions than metal or MDF pegboard alternatives. It is not recommended for fully exposed outdoor use with direct rain or prolonged UV exposure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eAre the bins removable and can they be used independently?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. All bins are \u003cstrong\u003efully removable\u003c\/strong\u003e from the pegboard panels and can be used independently as standalone containers on a workbench, shelf, or tool cart. They are also stackable when not mounted on the pegboard. The open, lid-free design keeps contents visible and accessible at all times without needing to open or remove a lid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat is included in the 44-piece kit?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe 44-piece kit includes \u003cstrong\u003e2 grey pegboard back panels\u003c\/strong\u003e, multiple storage bins in three sizes (small, medium, and large), pegboard hooks in various configurations, and all mounting hardware. All pieces are made from PP plastic in an orange and grey color scheme. The exact bin and hook count breakdown is included in the product packaging.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eAre the hooks compatible with standard pegboard systems?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe included hooks are designed \u003cstrong\u003especifically for the hole pattern on these panels\u003c\/strong\u003e. Standard metal pegboard hooks from other brands may not be compatible due to differences in hole spacing or peg diameter between plastic and metal pegboard systems. We recommend using the included hooks and accessories for the best fit and stability on these panels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow do I mount this pegboard to the wall?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe panels include \u003cstrong\u003epre-drilled mounting holes\u003c\/strong\u003e on the back for wall installation. Mounting hardware is included in the kit. For wood stud walls, mount directly into studs for maximum load support. For drywall-only installation, use appropriate wall anchors rated for the intended load. The lightweight PP construction (6 lbs total product weight) makes single-person installation generally manageable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-cta\"\u003e\n 🛒 Add to cart above — ships from our US warehouse.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52369650745618,"sku":"W2225P217938","price":82.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/f2e0ff71c0c12638626ea2a2207b5060.jpg?v=1781148833"},{"product_id":"metal-power-tool-organizer-7-slot-drill-holder-rack-pegboard-150lb-black","title":"Heavy Duty Metal Power Tool Organizer, 7-Slot Cordless Drill Holder Rack, 150 lb Capacity, Pegboard Compatible, Black","description":"\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n \"mainEntity\": [\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What size cordless drills fit in this organizer?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The 7 slots are designed to hold most standard cordless drills and driver-drills from major brands. The slots are generally sized to accommodate compact to full-size cordless drills. If you have an unusually large drill body or an extended battery pack, contact us to confirm fit before purchasing.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How much weight can this tool organizer hold?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The organizer is rated for up to 150 lbs of total load capacity when properly mounted or placed on a stable surface. Distribute weight evenly across the 7 slots for safe, stable use. The heavy-duty metal construction provides the structural support for this rating under normal workshop and garage conditions.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can this organizer be mounted on a pegboard?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Yes. This tool organizer is designed to be compatible with standard pegboard systems, allowing you to mount it directly on an existing garage or workshop pegboard wall. It can also be used freestanding on a workbench, shelf, or tool cabinet top without pegboard mounting. Pegboard hooks or mounting hardware may be required and are generally sold separately.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can I store tools other than drills in this organizer?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Yes. While the 7 slots are optimized for cordless drills and impact drivers, the organizer can also hold screwdrivers, wrenches, small power tools, and other similarly sized hand tools. The open-slot design accommodates a range of tool handle diameters and body shapes beyond just drills.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can this organizer be used in a humid garage?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The organizer is constructed from metal with a rust-resistant finish, making it suitable for covered garage and workshop environments. It is generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor use with direct rain or standing moisture. For humid garages, ensure adequate ventilation around the organizer to minimize surface moisture buildup over time.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How difficult is assembly and what tools are needed?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Assembly is generally straightforward and typically takes 10 to 20 minutes. Minimal tools are required. All necessary hardware is included in the package. The organizer can be set up freestanding immediately after assembly, or mounted to a pegboard using standard pegboard hooks.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Is this a good gift for a DIYer or mechanic?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Yes. This cordless drill organizer is a practical, functional gift for anyone who works in a garage or workshop and owns multiple cordless tools. It solves a common organization problem — drills and drivers left on workbenches or stored in cases — and keeps tools visible, accessible, and protected between uses. It works well as a gift for Father's Day, birthdays, or any occasion for the tool-oriented person in your life.\"\n }\n }\n ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-desc\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-overview\"\u003e\n \u003ch2\u003eMetal Power Tool Organizer with 7-Slot Drill Holder — 150 lb Capacity, Pegboard Compatible, Garage \u0026amp; Workshop Ready\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhen cordless drills are sitting on the workbench, buried in a tool bag, or stacked in cases that take up half a shelf, finding the right tool at the start of every job wastes time. This metal power tool organizer with 7-slot drill holder is built for homeowners, mechanics, and workshop users who own multiple cordless tools and want them stored upright, visible, and within reach — on a pegboard, a shelf, or a tool cabinet top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe organizer measures 25.98\" L (approx. 66 cm) x 7.48\" W (approx. 19 cm) x 12.20\" H (approx. 31 cm) and is constructed from heavy-duty metal in a black rust-resistant finish. Seven slots hold cordless drills, impact drivers, and similarly sized power tools securely upright. Total load capacity is rated at 150 lbs. The non-slip base and reinforced structure prevent tipping during loading and unloading. The unit is compatible with standard pegboard systems for wall mounting, or can be used freestanding on any flat surface. Product weight is 6.8 lbs; the package ships in a compact box (14.18\" L x 8.86\" W x 4.33\" H, 7.1 lbs).\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhether you’re organizing a garage workshop with a growing collection of cordless drills and impact drivers, mounting a compact tool rack on an existing pegboard wall to free up workbench space, or setting up a dedicated power tool storage station on a tool cabinet or rolling cart, this organizer keeps every drill visible, protected, and ready to grab. It’s equally effective as a cordless drill storage rack for a garage shelf, a pegboard-mounted power tool holder for a workshop wall, or a freestanding drill organizer for a basement utility room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-compat\"\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-compat-icon\"\u003eⓘ️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cstrong\u003eCompatible with standard pegboard systems for wall mounting.\u003c\/strong\u003e Also works freestanding on workbenches, shelves, and tool cabinet tops. Fits most standard cordless drills and impact drivers — contact us to confirm fit for oversized drill bodies or extended battery packs before ordering.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e✅ Key Features of These Metal Power Tool Organizers with Drill Holder Slots\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cul class=\"hdiy-features\"\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔧\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e7 Slots for Cordless Drills \u0026amp; Impact Drivers\u003c\/strong\u003e — Seven dedicated slots hold cordless drills, impact drivers, and similarly sized power tools securely upright — keeping them off the workbench and out of tool bags where they’re hard to find. The open-slot design accommodates a range of drill body sizes and battery configurations from most major cordless tool brands.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🏗️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeavy-Duty Metal, 150 lb Rated Capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e — The reinforced metal frame supports up to 150 lbs of total load — enough for a full set of cordless drills, impact drivers, and accessories without flex or instability. The rust-resistant black finish holds up in covered garage and workshop environments where tools are used and stored daily.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📌\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePegboard Compatible or Freestanding\u003c\/strong\u003e — Mount this cordless drill storage rack directly on an existing garage pegboard wall using standard pegboard hooks, or use it freestanding on a workbench, shelf, or tool cabinet top. The dual-use design gives you flexibility to integrate it into any existing garage storage system without committing to a single mounting method.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🚫\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNon-Slip Base — Prevents Tipping During Use\u003c\/strong\u003e — The non-slip base keeps the organizer stable on workbench surfaces and tool cabinet tops during loading and unloading. The reinforced structure prevents the rack from tipping forward when slots are unevenly loaded — a common issue with lighter plastic drill organizers that lack structural rigidity.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📦\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCompact Footprint — 25.98\" L x 7.48\" W x 12.2\" H\u003c\/strong\u003e — The slim 7.48-inch depth keeps the organizer from projecting far off a shelf or pegboard, preserving usable workspace in front of it. At 25.98 inches long, it fits comfortably on most standard garage shelving units, tool cabinets, and workbench surfaces without dominating the available space.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔨\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStores More Than Just Drills\u003c\/strong\u003e — Beyond cordless drills and impact drivers, the 7 slots accommodate screwdrivers, wrenches, small power tools, and other similarly sized hand tools. This makes the organizer a versatile garage storage rack for cordless tools and hand tools alike — not a single-purpose holder that becomes redundant as your tool collection changes.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e📐 Technical Specifications — Metal Power Tool Organizer with Drill Holder\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-table-wrap\"\u003e\n \u003ctable\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembled Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25.98\" L x 7.48\" W x 12.20\" H (approx. 66 cm x 19 cm x 31 cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNumber of Slots\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7 (for cordless drills, impact drivers, and similar tools)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTotal Load Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 lbs (evenly distributed)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy-duty metal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFinish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRust-resistant, scratch-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNon-slip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMounting Options\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePegboard compatible (standard pegboard hooks) or freestanding\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembly\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequired — minimal tools needed; hardware included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6.8 lbs (approx. 3.1 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e14.18\" L x 8.86\" W x 4.33\" H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7.1 lbs (approx. 3.2 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGarage, workshop, shed, tool cabinet top, pegboard wall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n \u003c\/table\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat size cordless drills fit in this organizer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe 7 slots are designed to hold most \u003cstrong\u003estandard cordless drills and impact drivers\u003c\/strong\u003e from major brands. The slots are generally sized to accommodate compact to full-size cordless drill bodies. If you have an unusually large drill body or an extended battery pack, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e to confirm fit before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can this tool organizer hold?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe organizer is rated for up to \u003cstrong\u003e150 lbs of total load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e when properly mounted or placed on a stable surface. Distribute weight evenly across the 7 slots for safe, stable use. The heavy-duty metal construction provides the structural support for this rating under normal workshop and garage conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan this organizer be mounted on a pegboard?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. This tool organizer is designed to be \u003cstrong\u003ecompatible with standard pegboard systems\u003c\/strong\u003e, allowing you to mount it directly on an existing garage or workshop pegboard wall. It can also be used freestanding on a workbench, shelf, or tool cabinet top without pegboard mounting. Pegboard hooks or mounting hardware may be required and are generally sold separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan I store tools other than drills in this organizer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. While the 7 slots are optimized for \u003cstrong\u003ecordless drills and impact drivers\u003c\/strong\u003e, the organizer can also hold screwdrivers, wrenches, small power tools, and other similarly sized hand tools. The open-slot design accommodates a range of tool handle diameters and body shapes beyond just drills.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan this organizer be used in a humid garage?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe organizer is constructed from metal with a \u003cstrong\u003erust-resistant finish\u003c\/strong\u003e, making it suitable for covered garage and workshop environments. It is generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor use with direct rain or standing moisture. For humid garages, ensure adequate ventilation around the organizer to minimize surface moisture buildup over time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow difficult is assembly and what tools are needed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eAssembly is generally straightforward and typically takes \u003cstrong\u003e10–20 minutes\u003c\/strong\u003e. Minimal tools are required — all necessary hardware is included in the package. The organizer can be set up freestanding immediately after assembly, or mounted to a pegboard using standard pegboard hooks for wall-mounted garage storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eIs this a good gift for a DIYer or mechanic?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. This cordless drill organizer is a practical, functional gift for anyone who works in a garage or workshop and owns multiple cordless tools. It solves a common organization problem — drills and drivers left on workbenches or stored in cases — and keeps tools \u003cstrong\u003evisible, accessible, and protected\u003c\/strong\u003e between uses. It works well as a gift for Father’s Day, birthdays, or any occasion for the tool-oriented person in your life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-cta\"\u003e\n 🛒 Add to cart above — ships from our US warehouse.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52370272551186,"sku":"W2181P351801","price":92.77,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/01d3f129d3ad2635153192cf42671fd2.jpg?v=1781156539"},{"product_id":"metal-pegboard-panels-2-pack-24x12-steel-garage-tool-storage-88lb-black","title":"Metal Pegboard Panels 2-Pack, 24\"x12\" Steel Wall Organizer for Garage Tool Storage, 88 lb Capacity, Black","description":"\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n \"mainEntity\": [\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What size wall space do I need for these pegboard panels?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Each panel measures 24 inches wide x 12 inches tall. The two panels can be mounted side by side (48 inches wide x 12 inches tall) or stacked vertically (24 inches wide x 24 inches tall), depending on your available wall space. Allow a few extra inches around each panel for mounting hardware and comfortable hook access at the edges.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How much weight can these metal pegboard panels hold?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The two-panel set is rated for up to 88 lbs of total load capacity when properly mounted to a solid wall surface. Distribute weight evenly across both panels rather than concentrating heavy tools on a single hook or a small area of one panel. For maximum load support, mount into wall studs.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What is the volcanic hole design and why does it matter?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The volcanic hole design features reinforced hole edges that grip pegboard hooks more securely than standard flat-punched holes. This prevents hooks from loosening, rotating, or falling off during use — a common issue with thinner or lower-gauge metal pegboard panels. It is particularly useful when hanging heavier tools like hammers, drills, and hand saws that create downward and lateral force on the hooks.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Are standard pegboard hooks compatible with these panels?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"These panels use a standard pegboard hole pattern and are generally compatible with standard 1\/4-inch pegboard hooks and accessories sold separately. The volcanic hole design is an enhancement to the standard hole pattern, not a proprietary format. Most standard metal pegboard hooks from major brands will fit these panels.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can these panels be used outdoors or in a humid garage?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The panels are made from Q235 carbon steel with a powder-coated finish that resists rust and corrosion in covered garage, workshop, and hardware store environments. They are generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor use with direct rain or standing moisture. For humid garages, ensure adequate ventilation to minimize condensation on the panel surface.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can I mount these panels on concrete or masonry walls?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Yes. These panels can be mounted on concrete, masonry, and wood stud walls. For concrete or masonry installations, use appropriate expansion anchors rated for the intended load (not included). For wood stud walls, mount directly into studs for maximum load support. Mounting hardware specifics are not listed — contact us to confirm what is included in the package.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How do I arrange the two panels for maximum coverage?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The two 24-inch x 12-inch panels give you 576 square inches of total pegboard surface. Mounting them side by side creates a 48-inch wide x 12-inch tall horizontal run — ideal above a workbench. Stacking them vertically creates a 24-inch wide x 24-inch tall section — better for narrow wall spaces between shelving units or cabinets. Both configurations use the same mounting hardware.\"\n }\n }\n ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-desc\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-overview\"\u003e\n \u003ch2\u003eMetal Pegboard Panels 2-Pack — 24\"x12\" Q235 Steel Wall Organizer with 88 lb Capacity \u0026amp; Volcanic Hole Design\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhen a single pegboard panel isn’t wide enough to cover the wall above your workbench, or when hooks keep loosening and falling off a thin panel under the weight of real tools, it’s time to upgrade to a proper steel solution. These metal pegboard panels in a 2-pack are built for homeowners, mechanics, and workshop users who need a rigid, hook-secure wall organizer that handles hammers, drills, hand saws, and heavy accessories without sagging or losing hooks mid-use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe set includes 2 panels, each measuring 24\" W x 12\" H (approx. 61 cm x 30 cm), for a combined surface area of 576 square inches. Each panel is constructed from Q235 carbon steel — a structural-grade steel known for its strength and rigidity — with a black powder-coated finish that resists rust and corrosion. The upgraded volcanic hole design features reinforced hole edges that grip standard pegboard hooks more securely than flat-punched holes, preventing hooks from rotating or falling off under load. Total two-panel weight capacity is 88 lbs. Product weight is 8.28 lbs; the package ships in a compact box (25.98\" L x 13.39\" W x 2.56\" H, 8.38 lbs).\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhether you’re building out a garage tool wall above a workbench with a full set of hand tools and power tool accessories, adding a compact metal pegboard section to a workshop or hardware storage room where hooks need to stay put under daily use, or expanding an existing pegboard system with additional panels that match standard hook spacing, this 2-pack gives you the surface area and structural integrity to do it right. It’s equally effective as a steel garage pegboard wall organizer, a workshop tool storage panel for heavy tools, or a wall-mounted metal pegboard for a shed or utility room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-compat\"\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-compat-icon\"\u003eⓘ️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cstrong\u003eCompatible with standard 1\/4\" pegboard hooks and accessories.\u003c\/strong\u003e The volcanic hole design is an enhancement to the standard hole pattern — most standard metal pegboard hooks from major brands will fit. Panels can be mounted side by side (48\" W x 12\" H) or stacked vertically (24\" W x 24\" H). Mounts on wood stud, concrete, and masonry walls.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e✅ Key Features of These Metal Pegboard Panels\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cul class=\"hdiy-features\"\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🌋\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVolcanic Hole Design — Hooks Stay Locked in Place\u003c\/strong\u003e — The reinforced volcanic hole edges grip standard pegboard hooks more securely than flat-punched holes, preventing hooks from rotating, loosening, or falling off under the weight of hammers, drills, and hand saws. This is the key structural difference between these panels and standard thin-gauge metal or MDF pegboard alternatives.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🏗️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ235 Carbon Steel — Structural-Grade Rigidity\u003c\/strong\u003e — Q235 is a structural-grade carbon steel used in construction and industrial applications for its strength and dimensional stability. These panels resist flex and deformation under load, maintaining a flat, rigid surface even when fully loaded with heavy garage tools — unlike thinner decorative metal panels that bow under weight.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📌\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e576 sq in Total Surface Area — 2 Panels, Flexible Layout\u003c\/strong\u003e — Two 24\" x 12\" panels give you 576 square inches of usable pegboard surface. Mount them side by side for a 48-inch wide horizontal run above a workbench, or stack them vertically for a 24-inch wide x 24-inch tall section in a narrower wall space. Both configurations use the same standard mounting approach.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🛡️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e88 lb Rated Capacity for Heavy Tool Storage\u003c\/strong\u003e — The two-panel set supports up to 88 lbs of evenly distributed load — enough for a full set of hand tools, power tool accessories, and hardware bins. This capacity rating makes these panels suitable for hanging hammers, drills, wrenches, and hand saws that lighter pegboard panels can’t safely support.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🌧️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePowder-Coated Black Finish — Rust \u0026amp; Corrosion Resistant\u003c\/strong\u003e — The black powder coat provides a durable, rust-resistant surface that holds up in covered garage, workshop, and hardware store environments. The finish also gives the panels a clean, consistent appearance that pairs well with black pegboard hooks and accessories for a cohesive garage wall storage setup.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔌\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStandard Hook Spacing — Expandable System\u003c\/strong\u003e — The standard 1-inch hole grid spacing means these panels integrate seamlessly with existing pegboard hook collections and accessories. Add more panels to expand your garage tool wall organizer over time without needing to replace hooks or switch to a proprietary accessory system.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e📐 Technical Specifications — Metal Pegboard Panels\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-table-wrap\"\u003e\n \u003ctable\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePanel Dimensions (each)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24\" W x 12\" H (approx. 61 cm x 30 cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eQuantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 panels per set\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTotal Surface Area\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e576 sq in (2 x 288 sq in per panel)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTotal Load Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e88 lbs (evenly distributed across both panels)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eQ235 carbon steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFinish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated, rust- and corrosion-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHole Design\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVolcanic hole (reinforced edges for hook retention)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHook Compatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard 1\/4\" pegboard hooks (generally compatible)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMounting Options\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide by side (48\" W x 12\" H) or stacked (24\" W x 24\" H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWall Compatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWood stud, concrete, masonry\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8.28 lbs (approx. 3.8 kg) for 2 panels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25.98\" L x 13.39\" W x 2.56\" H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8.38 lbs (approx. 3.8 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGarage, workshop, hardware store, shed, utility room\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n \u003c\/table\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat size wall space do I need for these pegboard panels?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eEach panel measures \u003cstrong\u003e24\" wide x 12\" tall\u003c\/strong\u003e. The two panels can be mounted side by side (\u003cstrong\u003e48\" wide x 12\" tall\u003c\/strong\u003e) or stacked vertically (\u003cstrong\u003e24\" wide x 24\" tall\u003c\/strong\u003e), depending on your available wall space. Allow a few extra inches around each panel for mounting hardware and comfortable hook access at the edges.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can these metal pegboard panels hold?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe two-panel set is rated for up to \u003cstrong\u003e88 lbs of total load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e when properly mounted to a solid wall surface. Distribute weight evenly across both panels rather than concentrating heavy tools on a single hook or a small area of one panel. For maximum load support, mount into wall studs rather than drywall anchors alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat is the volcanic hole design and why does it matter?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe volcanic hole design features \u003cstrong\u003ereinforced hole edges\u003c\/strong\u003e that grip pegboard hooks more securely than standard flat-punched holes. This prevents hooks from loosening, rotating, or falling off during use — a common issue with thinner or lower-gauge metal pegboard panels. It is particularly useful when hanging heavier tools like hammers, drills, and hand saws that create downward and lateral force on the hooks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eAre standard pegboard hooks compatible with these panels?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. These panels use a \u003cstrong\u003estandard pegboard hole pattern\u003c\/strong\u003e and are generally compatible with standard 1\/4-inch pegboard hooks and accessories sold separately. The volcanic hole design is an enhancement to the standard hole pattern, not a proprietary format. Most standard metal pegboard hooks from major brands will fit these panels without modification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan these panels be used outdoors or in a humid garage?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe panels are made from Q235 carbon steel with a \u003cstrong\u003epowder-coated finish\u003c\/strong\u003e that resists rust and corrosion in covered garage, workshop, and hardware store environments. They are generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor use with direct rain or standing moisture. For humid garages, ensure adequate ventilation to minimize condensation on the panel surface over time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan I mount these panels on concrete or masonry walls?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. These panels can be mounted on \u003cstrong\u003econcrete, masonry, and wood stud walls\u003c\/strong\u003e. For concrete or masonry installations, use appropriate expansion anchors rated for the intended load (not included). For wood stud walls, mount directly into studs for maximum load support. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e to confirm what mounting hardware is included in the package before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow do I arrange the two panels for maximum coverage?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe two 24\" x 12\" panels give you \u003cstrong\u003e576 square inches\u003c\/strong\u003e of total pegboard surface. Mounting them \u003cstrong\u003eside by side\u003c\/strong\u003e creates a 48\" wide x 12\" tall horizontal run — ideal above a workbench. \u003cstrong\u003eStacking them vertically\u003c\/strong\u003e creates a 24\" wide x 24\" tall section — better for narrow wall spaces between shelving units or cabinets. Both configurations use the same standard mounting approach.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-cta\"\u003e\n 🛒 Add to cart above — ships from our US warehouse.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52370335334674,"sku":null,"price":66.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/49c46f661a3fe836aa183fea4e9d175c.jpg?v=1781157599"},{"product_id":"modular-plastic-pegboard-wall-organizer-kit-4-panel-11x11-abs-black","title":"Modular Plastic Pegboard Wall Organizer Kit, 4-Panel 11\"x11\" ABS Panels, 20 lb per Panel, Black","description":"\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n \"mainEntity\": [\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How can I arrange the 4 panels for different wall sizes?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Each panel measures 11 inches x 11 inches. The four panels can be arranged in multiple configurations: a 2x2 grid (22 inches wide x 22 inches tall), a 1x4 horizontal row (44 inches wide x 11 inches tall), a 4x1 vertical column (11 inches wide x 44 inches tall), or an L-shape or custom layout. The modular interlocking design lets you connect panels in any configuration that fits your available wall space.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How much weight can each panel hold?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Each panel is rated for up to 20 lbs of load capacity when properly mounted to a solid wall surface. With 4 panels, the total system capacity is up to 80 lbs when all panels are mounted and loaded. Distribute weight evenly across each panel and avoid concentrating heavy items on a single hook or a small area of one panel.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can this pegboard be used in a kitchen or bathroom?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Yes. The ABS plastic construction is moisture-resistant and will not rust or corrode, making it suitable for kitchen, bathroom, and laundry room wall installations where metal pegboard panels would be at risk of surface rust. ABS plastic is also easy to wipe clean, which is practical for kitchen spice and utensil storage applications.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Are standard pegboard hooks compatible with these panels?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"These panels are designed for use with pegboard hooks and accessories compatible with their specific hole pattern. Standard metal pegboard hooks designed for 1\/4-inch hole spacing may or may not be compatible depending on the exact hole size and spacing of these plastic panels. We recommend using hooks and accessories specifically designed for plastic pegboard systems, or contact us to confirm hook compatibility before purchasing additional accessories.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can I add more panels to expand the system later?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Yes. The modular interlocking design allows you to connect additional panels to expand your wall organizer over time. Additional panels of the same model can be added to any edge of the existing layout. Contact us to confirm panel availability and compatibility if you plan to expand beyond the 4-panel kit.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What rooms and spaces is this pegboard kit suitable for?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"This modular pegboard kit is designed for a wide range of indoor spaces including kitchens (spice and utensil storage), bedrooms (accessory and jewelry display), home offices (desk and wall organization), craft rooms (supply storage), entryways (key and bag hooks), and garages or workshops for lightweight tool and accessory storage. The ABS plastic construction and black finish suit both functional and decorative applications.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How do I mount these panels to the wall?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The panels include mounting points on the back for wall installation. For wood stud walls, mount directly into studs for maximum load support. For drywall-only installation, use appropriate wall anchors rated for the intended load per panel. The lightweight ABS construction (4.09 lbs total for 4 panels) makes single-person installation generally manageable. Contact us to confirm what mounting hardware is included in the kit.\"\n }\n }\n ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-desc\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-overview\"\u003e\n \u003ch2\u003eModular Plastic Pegboard Wall Organizer Kit — 4 Panels, 11\"x11\" Each, 20 lb per Panel, Flexible Layout for Any Room\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhen a fixed-size pegboard panel doesn’t fit the wall space you have, or when you need a wall organizer that works in a kitchen, bedroom, or home office without the rust risk of a metal panel, a modular plastic pegboard kit gives you the flexibility to build the layout you actually need. This modular plastic pegboard wall organizer kit is built for homeowners, renters, and organizers who want a customizable, room-friendly wall storage system that adapts to their space — not the other way around.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe kit includes 4 ABS plastic panels, each measuring approximately 11\" x 11\" (approx. 28 cm x 28 cm), for a combined coverage area of up to 484 square inches when arranged in a 2x2 grid. Each panel is rated for 20 lbs of load capacity, giving the full 4-panel system a total capacity of up to 80 lbs. The panels are made from ABS\/HIPS plastic in a black finish — moisture-resistant, lightweight, and easy to wipe clean. The modular interlocking design allows panels to be connected in any configuration: 2x2 grid, horizontal row, vertical column, or custom L-shape layouts. Total product weight is 4.09 lbs; the package ships in a compact box (11.42\" L x 11.61\" W x 5.51\" H, 4.19 lbs).\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhether you’re organizing a kitchen wall with spice jars, utensils, and small accessories in a moisture-resistant panel system, setting up a bedroom or home office wall organizer that doubles as a display and storage surface, or building a lightweight garage or craft room pegboard that can be reconfigured as your storage needs change, this 4-panel modular kit gives you the coverage and flexibility to do it without committing to a fixed layout. It’s equally effective as a kitchen pegboard wall organizer, a modular home office wall storage system, or a plastic pegboard panel kit for a craft room or entryway.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-compat\"\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-compat-icon\"\u003eⓘ️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cstrong\u003eModular interlocking design — panels connect in any configuration.\u003c\/strong\u003e 4 panels can be arranged as a 2x2 grid (22\" x 22\"), a 1x4 row (44\" x 11\"), a 4x1 column (11\" x 44\"), or a custom layout. ABS plastic construction is moisture-resistant and suitable for kitchens, bathrooms, and humid environments. Confirm hook compatibility before purchasing additional accessories.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e✅ Key Features of These Modular Plastic Pegboard Wall Organizer Kits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cul class=\"hdiy-features\"\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔄\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eModular Interlocking Panels — Build Any Layout\u003c\/strong\u003e — The four 11\" x 11\" panels connect to each other in any configuration — 2x2 grid, horizontal row, vertical column, or L-shape. This modular pegboard design lets you fit the organizer to your available wall space rather than cutting or forcing a fixed-size panel to work in a space it wasn’t designed for.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🌧️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eABS Plastic — Moisture-Resistant for Kitchen \u0026amp; Bathroom Use\u003c\/strong\u003e — The panels are molded from ABS\/HIPS plastic, which resists moisture, rust, and corrosion — making this pegboard wall organizer suitable for kitchens, bathrooms, laundry rooms, and humid garage environments where metal panels would be at risk of surface rust. The smooth surface is also easy to wipe clean.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🛡️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e20 lb per Panel — Up to 80 lb Total System Capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e — Each panel supports up to 20 lbs of load when properly wall-mounted, giving the full 4-panel system a total capacity of up to 80 lbs. This is sufficient for kitchen utensils, spice jars, small tools, craft supplies, and lightweight accessories across all four panels simultaneously.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🏠\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMulti-Room Versatility — Kitchen, Bedroom, Office \u0026amp; More\u003c\/strong\u003e — Unlike metal garage pegboards, this plastic wall organizer kit is designed for use across multiple room types — kitchen spice and utensil storage, bedroom accessory display, home office desk wall organization, craft room supply storage, and entryway key and bag hooks. The black finish suits both functional and decorative applications.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📦\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eExpandable System — Add More Panels Over Time\u003c\/strong\u003e — The modular interlocking design allows additional panels to be connected to any edge of the existing layout, so you can start with 4 panels and expand the system as your storage needs grow. This makes it a scalable wall storage solution rather than a fixed-size organizer you’ll outgrow.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🧭\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLightweight \u0026amp; Easy to Install — 4.09 lbs Total\u003c\/strong\u003e — The full 4-panel kit weighs just 4.09 lbs, making it easy to handle and mount without assistance. The lightweight ABS construction reduces wall anchor load requirements compared to metal pegboard panels of similar coverage area, making it a practical choice for drywall installations in apartments and rental spaces.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e📐 Technical Specifications — Modular Plastic Pegboard Wall Organizer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-table-wrap\"\u003e\n \u003ctable\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePanel Dimensions (each)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 11\" x 11\" (approx. 28 cm x 28 cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eQuantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 panels per kit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTotal Coverage (2x2 grid)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 22\" W x 22\" H (approx. 56 cm x 56 cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLoad Capacity (per panel)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 lbs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTotal System Capacity (4 panels)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 80 lbs (evenly distributed)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eABS \/ HIPS plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePanel Design\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModular interlocking — connects in any configuration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLayout Options\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2x2 grid, 1x4 row, 4x1 column, L-shape, or custom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHook Compatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContact us to confirm before purchasing additional accessories\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMoisture Resistance\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes — suitable for kitchen, bathroom, and humid environments\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembly\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequired — panels interlock; mounting hardware details: contact us to confirm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.09 lbs (approx. 1.9 kg) for 4 panels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e11.42\" L x 11.61\" W x 5.51\" H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.19 lbs (approx. 1.9 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKitchen, bedroom, home office, craft room, entryway, garage (lightweight use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n \u003c\/table\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow can I arrange the 4 panels for different wall sizes?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eEach panel measures approximately \u003cstrong\u003e11\" x 11\"\u003c\/strong\u003e. The four panels can be arranged in multiple configurations: a \u003cstrong\u003e2x2 grid\u003c\/strong\u003e (22\" wide x 22\" tall), a \u003cstrong\u003e1x4 horizontal row\u003c\/strong\u003e (44\" wide x 11\" tall), a \u003cstrong\u003e4x1 vertical column\u003c\/strong\u003e (11\" wide x 44\" tall), or an L-shape or custom layout. The modular interlocking design lets you connect panels in any configuration that fits your available wall space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can each panel hold?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eEach panel is rated for up to \u003cstrong\u003e20 lbs of load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e when properly mounted to a solid wall surface. With 4 panels, the total system capacity is up to \u003cstrong\u003e80 lbs\u003c\/strong\u003e when all panels are mounted and loaded. Distribute weight evenly across each panel and avoid concentrating heavy items on a single hook or a small area of one panel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan this pegboard be used in a kitchen or bathroom?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. The \u003cstrong\u003eABS plastic construction\u003c\/strong\u003e is moisture-resistant and will not rust or corrode, making it suitable for kitchen, bathroom, and laundry room wall installations where metal pegboard panels would be at risk of surface rust. ABS plastic is also easy to wipe clean, which is practical for kitchen spice and utensil storage applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eAre standard pegboard hooks compatible with these panels?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThese panels are designed for use with pegboard hooks compatible with their specific hole pattern. Standard metal pegboard hooks designed for 1\/4-inch hole spacing \u003cstrong\u003emay or may not be compatible\u003c\/strong\u003e depending on the exact hole size and spacing of these plastic panels. We recommend using hooks specifically designed for plastic pegboard systems, or \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e to confirm hook compatibility before purchasing additional accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan I add more panels to expand the system later?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eYes. The \u003cstrong\u003emodular interlocking design\u003c\/strong\u003e allows you to connect additional panels to expand your wall organizer over time. Additional panels of the same model can be added to any edge of the existing layout. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e to confirm panel availability and compatibility if you plan to expand beyond the 4-panel kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat rooms and spaces is this pegboard kit suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThis modular pegboard kit is designed for a wide range of indoor spaces including \u003cstrong\u003ekitchens\u003c\/strong\u003e (spice and utensil storage), \u003cstrong\u003ebedrooms\u003c\/strong\u003e (accessory and jewelry display), \u003cstrong\u003ehome offices\u003c\/strong\u003e (desk and wall organization), \u003cstrong\u003ecraft rooms\u003c\/strong\u003e (supply storage), \u003cstrong\u003eentryways\u003c\/strong\u003e (key and bag hooks), and garages or workshops for lightweight tool and accessory storage. The ABS plastic construction and black finish suit both functional and decorative applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow do I mount these panels to the wall?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe panels include mounting points on the back for wall installation. For wood stud walls, mount directly into studs for maximum load support. For drywall-only installation, use appropriate wall anchors rated for the intended load per panel. The lightweight ABS construction (4.09 lbs total for 4 panels) makes single-person installation generally manageable. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e to confirm what mounting hardware is included in the kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-cta\"\u003e\n 🛒 Add to cart above — ships from our US warehouse.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52370373411090,"sku":"T3342P440695","price":53.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/3c75a8aa7e984df4b1f774debf5a5565.jpg?v=1781158172"},{"product_id":"wall-mount-power-tool-organizer-3-tier-4-drill-holders-side-pegboards-100lb-red","title":"Wall Mount Power Tool Organizer, 3-Tier Rack with 4 Drill Holders \u0026 Side Pegboards, 100 lb Capacity, Q235 Steel, Red","description":"\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n \"mainEntity\": [\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What size drills and power tools fit in the 4 drill slots?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The 4 drill slots are designed to hold most standard cordless drills and impact drivers. The slots are generally sized to accommodate compact to full-size cordless drill bodies. If you have an unusually large drill body or an extended battery pack, contact us to confirm fit before purchasing.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How much weight can this tool organizer hold?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The rack supports up to 100 lbs total load capacity, with a maximum of 33 lbs per tier. Distribute weight evenly across all three tiers for safe, stable use. The Q235 carbon steel frame provides the structural support for this rating when the unit is properly wall-mounted into studs or appropriate anchors.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How does the adjustable middle shelf work?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The middle shelf height can be raised or lowered to accommodate tools and batteries of different sizes. This lets you fit large battery packs, bulky power tools, or taller accessories on the middle tier without being constrained by a fixed shelf height. Adjustment is generally tool-free or requires minimal hardware.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What accessories are compatible with the side pegboard panels?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The side pegboard panels feature 0.24-inch peg holes and are designed to accept a range of pegboard hooks and accessories for hanging hammers, screwdrivers, wrenches, pliers, and small accessories. Standard pegboard hooks with a peg diameter compatible with 0.24-inch holes are generally suitable. Contact us to confirm hook compatibility before purchasing additional accessories.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"Can this organizer be used in a humid garage?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"The Q235 carbon steel frame features a powder-coated finish that resists rust and corrosion in covered garage and workshop environments. The mesh shelf design also improves airflow around stored tools, reducing moisture buildup. This organizer is generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor use with direct rain or standing moisture.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"What wall types can this organizer be mounted on?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"This wall-mounted tool organizer can be installed on wood stud walls, concrete, and masonry surfaces. For wood stud walls, mount directly into studs for maximum load support given the 100 lb total capacity. For concrete or masonry walls, use appropriate expansion anchors rated for the intended load. Mounting hardware details are not specified — contact us to confirm what is included.\"\n }\n },\n {\n \"@type\": \"Question\",\n \"name\": \"How long does assembly and wall mounting take?\",\n \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n \"text\": \"Assembly and wall mounting typically takes 20 to 40 minutes. A basic drill, level, and screwdriver are generally all that is needed. The unit weighs 7.77 lbs, making single-person installation manageable. We recommend having a second person assist with holding the unit in position during wall mounting for accurate alignment.\"\n }\n }\n ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-desc\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-overview\"\u003e\n \u003ch2\u003eWall Mount Power Tool Organizer — 3-Tier Rack with 4 Drill Holders, Side Pegboards \u0026amp; 100 lb Capacity\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhen cordless drills are sitting on a shelf with no dedicated slots, batteries are scattered across the workbench, and hand tools are hanging off random nails with no system, every job starts with a search. This wall mount power tool organizer with 3-tier rack, 4 drill holders, and side pegboards is built for garage DIYers, mechanics, and workshop users who want a structured, wall-mounted storage station that keeps drills, batteries, and hand tools organized in one compact unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe assembled rack measures 23.31\" W x 8.66\" D x 12.01\" H (approx. 59 cm x 22 cm x 30 cm) and is constructed from Q235 carbon steel — a structural-grade steel — with a red powder-coated finish that resists rust and corrosion. The 3-tier design includes an adjustable middle shelf that raises or lowers to fit large batteries and bulky tools, 4 dedicated drill slots for cordless drills and impact drivers, and side-mounted pegboard panels with 0.24-inch peg holes for hanging hand tools and accessories. Mesh shelf surfaces improve airflow around stored tools. Total load capacity is 100 lbs (33 lbs per tier). Product weight is 7.77 lbs; the package ships in a compact box (17.32\" L x 9.45\" W x 3.74\" H, 7.87 lbs).\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eWhether you’re building out a garage tool wall that keeps cordless drills, impact drivers, and hand tools all in one wall-mounted station, mounting a compact power tool storage rack above a workbench to free up bench surface space, or organizing a workshop with a dedicated drill holder rack that also handles wrenches, screwdrivers, and hammers on the side pegboards, this organizer delivers structured storage in a footprint that fits between studs and above most workbenches. It’s equally effective as a wall-mounted cordless drill storage rack for a garage, a 3-tier power tool shelf with pegboard sides for a workshop, or a compact tool holder rack for a shed or utility room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-compat\"\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-compat-icon\"\u003eⓘ️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cstrong\u003eWall-mount installation required — mounts on wood stud, concrete, and masonry walls.\u003c\/strong\u003e For 100 lb total capacity, mount into wall studs or use load-rated anchors. Side pegboard panels feature 0.24\" peg holes — confirm hook peg diameter compatibility before purchasing additional accessories. Fits most standard cordless drills in the 4 dedicated slots.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e✅ Key Features of These Wall Mount Power Tool Organizers with Drill Holders\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cul class=\"hdiy-features\"\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🔧\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e4 Dedicated Drill Slots for Cordless Tools\u003c\/strong\u003e — Four dedicated slots hold cordless drills and impact drivers securely upright, keeping them off the workbench and out of tool bags. The slot design keeps drill bodies stable and accessible without tipping — a practical improvement over flat shelves where drills roll and slide during retrieval.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📈\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAdjustable Middle Shelf for Large Batteries \u0026amp; Bulky Tools\u003c\/strong\u003e — The middle tier height adjusts to accommodate large battery packs, bulky power tools, and taller accessories that a fixed-height shelf can’t fit. Raise or lower it in seconds to double your effective storage capacity without reconfiguring the entire rack.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📌\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSide Pegboard Panels with 0.24\" Peg Holes\u003c\/strong\u003e — The dense 0.24-inch peg hole pattern on both side panels accepts a range of pegboard hooks for hanging hammers, screwdrivers, wrenches, pliers, and small accessories alongside the main shelf tiers. The side-mount design keeps the front of the rack fully open for drill slot access while maximizing vertical storage on the sides.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🏗️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ235 Carbon Steel — 100 lb Total, 33 lb per Tier\u003c\/strong\u003e — The Q235 structural-grade carbon steel frame supports 100 lbs total load capacity with 33 lbs per tier — enough for a full set of cordless drills, battery packs, and hand tools across all three levels. The frame resists flex and deformation under load, providing a stable, wobble-free storage station on the wall.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e🌧️\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMesh Shelves + Red Powder-Coat Finish\u003c\/strong\u003e — The mesh shelf surface improves airflow around stored tools, reducing moisture and heat buildup between battery packs and power tool bodies during storage. The red powder-coated finish resists chips, scratches, and surface rust in covered garage and workshop environments, and gives the rack a clean, high-visibility look on the wall.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n \u003cspan class=\"hdiy-icon\"\u003e📦\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003cspan\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCompact Wall-Mount Footprint — 23.31\" W x 12.01\" H\u003c\/strong\u003e — At 23.31 inches wide and 12.01 inches tall, this power tool storage rack fits between standard 24-inch stud bays and above most workbenches without consuming floor space. The 8.66-inch depth keeps the rack close to the wall, preserving clearance in front of it for comfortable tool access and workbench use.\u003c\/span\u003e\n \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e📐 Technical Specifications — Wall Mount Power Tool Organizer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-table-wrap\"\u003e\n \u003ctable\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembled Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e23.31\" W x 8.66\" D x 12.01\" H (approx. 59 cm x 22 cm x 30 cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNumber of Tiers\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 (top, adjustable middle, bottom)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDrill Holder Slots\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 (for cordless drills and impact drivers)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMiddle Shelf\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSide Pegboard Panels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded — 0.24\" peg holes; accepts compatible pegboard hooks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShelf Surface\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMesh (improves airflow)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTotal Load Capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 lbs (33 lbs per tier)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eQ235 carbon steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFinish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated, rust-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMounting Type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWall-mount (wood stud, concrete, masonry)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembly\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequired — hardware and instructions included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7.77 lbs (approx. 3.5 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17.32\" L x 9.45\" W x 3.74\" H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage Weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7.87 lbs (approx. 3.6 kg)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGarage, workshop, workbench wall, shed, utility room\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n \u003c\/table\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003ch2\u003e❓ Frequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq\"\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat size drills and power tools fit in the 4 drill slots?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe 4 drill slots are designed to hold most \u003cstrong\u003estandard cordless drills and impact drivers\u003c\/strong\u003e. The slots are generally sized to accommodate compact to full-size cordless drill bodies. If you have an unusually large drill body or an extended battery pack, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e to confirm fit before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can this tool organizer hold?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe rack supports up to \u003cstrong\u003e100 lbs total load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e, with a maximum of \u003cstrong\u003e33 lbs per tier\u003c\/strong\u003e. Distribute weight evenly across all three tiers for safe, stable use. The Q235 carbon steel frame provides the structural support for this rating when the unit is properly wall-mounted into studs or appropriate load-rated anchors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow does the adjustable middle shelf work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe middle shelf height can be \u003cstrong\u003eraised or lowered\u003c\/strong\u003e to accommodate tools and batteries of different sizes. This lets you fit large battery packs, bulky power tools, or taller accessories on the middle tier without being constrained by a fixed shelf height. Adjustment is generally tool-free or requires minimal hardware — refer to the included instructions for the specific adjustment method.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat accessories are compatible with the side pegboard panels?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe side pegboard panels feature \u003cstrong\u003e0.24-inch peg holes\u003c\/strong\u003e and are designed to accept pegboard hooks and accessories for hanging hammers, screwdrivers, wrenches, pliers, and small accessories. Standard pegboard hooks with a peg diameter compatible with 0.24-inch holes are generally suitable. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e to confirm hook compatibility before purchasing additional accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eCan this organizer be used in a humid garage?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThe Q235 carbon steel frame features a \u003cstrong\u003epowder-coated finish\u003c\/strong\u003e that resists rust and corrosion in covered garage and workshop environments. The mesh shelf design also improves airflow around stored tools, reducing moisture buildup between battery packs and tool bodies. This organizer is generally not recommended for fully exposed outdoor use with direct rain or standing moisture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eWhat wall types can this organizer be mounted on?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eThis wall-mounted tool organizer can be installed on \u003cstrong\u003ewood stud walls, concrete, and masonry surfaces\u003c\/strong\u003e. For wood stud walls, mount directly into studs for maximum load support given the 100 lb total capacity. For concrete or masonry walls, use appropriate expansion anchors rated for the intended load. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e to confirm what mounting hardware is included in the package.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003cdetails\u003e\n \u003csummary\u003eHow long does assembly and wall mounting take?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-faq-body\"\u003e\n \u003cp\u003eAssembly and wall mounting typically takes \u003cstrong\u003e20–40 minutes\u003c\/strong\u003e. A basic drill, level, and screwdriver are generally all that is needed. The unit weighs 7.77 lbs, making single-person installation manageable. We recommend having a second person assist with holding the unit in position during wall mounting for accurate alignment and safety.\u003c\/p\u003e\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n \u003c\/details\u003e\n\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n \u003cdiv class=\"hdiy-cta\"\u003e\n 🛒 Add to cart above — ships from our US warehouse.\n \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"HomeDIYer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52370390515986,"sku":"T3342P475420","price":55.3,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0884\/8936\/1682\/files\/53f670d8d38a667d9df6c90474043af8.jpg?v=1781160780"}],"url":"https:\/\/homediyer.com\/collections\/pegboard.oembed","provider":"HomeDIYer","version":"1.0","type":"link"}